IOWA ADMINISTRATIVEBULLETIN
Published Biweekly VOLUME XXII NUMBER 20 April 5,
2000 Pages 1421 to 1516
CONTENTS IN THIS ISSUE
Pages 1431 to 1493 include ARC 9748A to ARC
9776A
ALL AGENCIES
Schedule for rule making 1424
Publication procedures 1425
Administrative rules on CD–ROM 1425
Agency identification numbers 1429
CITATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE RULES 1423
CORRECTIONS DEPARTMENT[201]
Notice, Private sector employment projects,
37.5 ARC
9775A 1431
Notice, Utilization of offender labor in
construction and
maintenance projects, 37.6
ARC 9776A 1432
DELAYS
Educational Examiners Board[282]
Complaints,
investigations, contested
case hearings, ch 11 1494
Education Department[281]
Juvenile homes—unauthorized
expenditures,
63.18(4) 1494
Racing and Gaming Commission[491]
Waivers or variances from
rules, 1.8 1494
Workforce Development Board/
Services
Division[877]
Requests for waiver of rules, 2.4 1494
EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS BOARD[282]
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]“umbrella“
Delay, Complaints, investigations, contested
case hearings,
ch 11 1494
Notice, Special education endorsements, 15.1,
15.2 ARC
9766A 1433
Notice, Paraeducator certificates, ch 22
ARC
9765A 1436
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
Delay, Juvenile homes—unauthorized
expenditures,
63.18(4) 1494
Notice, Appeal procedures, 6.17 ARC
9773A 1438
Filed Emergency, Appeal procedures, 6.17
ARC
9774A 1454
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
COMMISSION[567]
NATURAL RESOURCES
DEPARTMENT[561]“umbrella”
Notice of public meetings 1438
EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT
Executive Order Number 15 1495
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
Notice, Risk pool funding, 25.61 to 25.66
ARC
9748A 1439
Notice, Food stamp recipients—exemption of
census
income, 41.27(7), 65.29(3), 75.57(7)
ARC 9750A 1440
Filed Emergency, Risk pool funding, 25.61 to
25.66 ARC
9749A 1454
Filed Emergency, Food stamp recipients—
exemption of
census income, 41.27(7),
65.29(3), 75.57(7) ARC 9751A 1456
Filed, Rent subsidy program, 53.2(2), 53.3(2),
53.4(2)
ARC 9752A 1460
Filed, Placement and readmission criteria—
highly
structured juvenile programs,
114.2, 185.83(4) ARC
9753A 1461
Filed, Rehabilitative treatment and supportive
services
contract—effective date, 152.8,
152.22(6) ARC
9754A 1462
INSURANCE DIVISION[191]
COMMERCE
DEPARTMENT[181]“umbrella”
Notice, Accident and health insurance
consumer guide, 35.35
to 35.37 ARC 9756A 1440
LOTTERY DIVISION[705]
REVENUE AND FINANCE
DEPARTMENT[701]“umbrella”
Notice Terminated, Waiver or variance from rules,
1.30
ARC 9772A 1441
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]
NATURAL RESOURCES
DEPARTMENT[561]“umbrella”
Notice of public meetings 1438
Notice, Volunteer safety/education
instructor
certification, 15.9 to 15.12 ARC 9769A 1441
Notice, General dock permits, 16.1, 16.3
ARC
9768A 1442
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571](Cont’d)
Notice, Community forestry grant program,
amendments to ch
34 ARC 9770A 1443
Filed Emergency, Community forestry grant
program,
amendments to ch 34 ARC 9771A 1457
NURSING BOARD[655]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Notice, Practice of LPNs—infusion pumps,
hypertonic
solutions, 6.5(4) ARC 9762A 1443
Filed, Examination, 2.1, 2.10, 2.11
ARC
9763A 1463
PHARMACY EXAMINERS BOARD[657]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Notice Terminated, Self–assessment of
pharmacy,
6.2(1), 7.6(7), 8.16, 8.17, 15.9, 36.1(4)
ARC
9757A 1444
Notice of public hearing,
Regulatory review, chs 10 to 12,
18 1444
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE DIVISION[645]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Notice, Optometry—licensure and continuing
education,
180.6, 180.11 to 180.18, 180.115,
ch 181 ARC 9767A 1444
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]
Notice, EMS training grants, 130.1, 130.4
ARC
9758A 1448
Filed, Radiation, amendments to chs 38 to 42,
45, 46
ARC 9759A 1463
PUBLIC HEARINGS
Summarized list 1426
RACING AND GAMING COMMISSION[491]
INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS
DEPARTMENT[481]“umbrella”
Delay, Waivers or variances from rules, 1.8 1494
SUPREME COURT
Decisions summarized 1498
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
Notice, Special mobile equipment, 410.1 to 410.3
ARC
9761A 1449
Notice, For–hire interstate motor carrier
authority,
529.1 ARC 9764A 1450
Filed, Reflective devices on slow–moving
vehicles,
452.1 to 452.3 ARC 9755A 1492
USURY
Notice 1450
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION DIVISION[876]
WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT[871]“umbrella”
Notice, General, 2.4, 4.2, 4.6, 4.17, 4.38, 4.39,
5.8(1),
5.9, 8.9, 9.1, 9.12(2), 9.13(1)
ARC 9760A 1450
WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT BOARD/
SERVICES
DIVISION[877]
WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT[871]“umbrella”
Delay, Requests for waiver of rules, 2.4 1494
CITATION of Administrative Rules
The Iowa
Administrative Code shall be cited as (agency identification number)
IAC
(chapter, rule, subrule, lettered paragraph, or numbered
subparagraph).
441 IAC 79 (Chapter)
441 IAC
79.1(249A) (Rule)
441 IAC 79.1(1) (Subrule)
441 IAC
79.1(1)“a” (Paragraph)
441 IAC
79.1(1)“a”(1) (Subparagraph)
The Iowa Administrative
Bulletin shall be cited as IAB (volume), (number), (publication
date), (page
number), (ARC number).
IAB Vol. XII, No. 23 (5/16/90) p. 2050, ARC
872A
PUBLISHED UNDER
AUTHORITY OF IOWA
CODE SECTIONS 2B.5 AND
17A.6
__________________________________
PREFACE
The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is published biweekly in
pamphlet form pursuant to Iowa Code chapters 2B and 17A and contains Notices of
Intended Action on rules, Filed and Filed Emergency rules by state agencies.
It also contains Proclamations and Executive Orders of the
Governor which are general and permanent in nature; Economic Impact Statements
to proposed rules and filed emergency rules; Objections filed by Administrative
Rules Review Committee, Governor or the Attorney General; and Delay by the
Committee of the effective date of filed rules; Regulatory Flexibility Analyses
and Agenda for monthly Administrative Rules Review Committee meetings. Other
“materials deemed fitting and proper by the Administrative Rules Review
Committee” include summaries of Public Hearings, Attorney General Opinions
and Supreme Court Decisions.
The Bulletin may also contain Public Funds Interest Rates
[12C.6]; Workers’ Compensation Rate Filings [515A.6(7)]; Usury
[535.2(3)“a”]; Agricultural Credit Corporation Maximum Loan Rates
[535.12]; and Regional Banking—Notice of Application and Hearing
[524.1905(2)].
PLEASE NOTE: Italics indicate new material
added to existing rules; strike through letters indicate
deleted material.
Subscriptions and Distribution Telephone:
(515)242–5120
Fax: (515)242–5974
KATHLEEN K. BATES, Administrative Code
Editor Telephone: (515)281–3355
STEPHANIE A. HOFF, Assistant
Editor (515)281–8157
Fax: (515)281–4424
SUBSCRIPTION
INFORMATION
Iowa Administrative
Bulletin
The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is sold as a separate
publication and may be purchased by subscription or single copy. All
subscriptions will expire on June 30 of each year. Subscriptions must be paid
in advance and are prorated quarterly.
July 1, 1999, to June 30, 2000 $253.86 plus
$12.69 sales tax
Iowa Administrative
Code
The Iowa Administrative Code and Supplements are sold in
complete sets and subscription basis only. All subscriptions for the Supplement
(replacement pages) must be for the complete year and will expire on June 30 of
each year.
Prices for the Iowa Administrative Code and its Supplements
are as follows:
Iowa Administrative Code - $1,163.76 plus $58.19 sales
tax
(Price includes 22 volumes of rules and index, plus a
one–year subscription to the Code Supplement and the Iowa Administrative
Bulletin.)
Iowa Administrative Code Supplement - $409.24 plus
$20.46 sales tax
(Subscription expires June 30, 2000)
All checks should be made payable to the Iowa State Printing
Division. Send all inquiries and subscription orders to:
Customer Service Center
Department of General Services
Hoover State Office Building, Level A
Des Moines, IA 50319
Telephone: (515)242–5120
Schedule for Rule
Making
2000
NOTICE SUBMISSION
DEADLINE
|
NOTICE PUB.
DATE
|
HEARING OR COMMENTS 20
DAYS
|
FIRST POSSIBLE ADOPTION
DATE 35 DAYS
|
ADOPTED FILING DEADLINE
|
ADOPTED PUB.
DATE
|
FIRST POSSIBLE
EFFECTIVE DATE
|
POSSIBLE EXPIRATION OF NOTICE 180
DAYS
|
Dec. 24 ’99
|
Jan. 12 ’00
|
Feb. 1 ’00
|
Feb. 16 ’00
|
Feb. 18 ’00
|
Mar. 8 ’00
|
Apr. 12 ’00
|
July 10 ’00
|
Jan. 7
|
Jan. 26
|
Feb. 15
|
Mar. 1
|
Mar. 3
|
Mar. 22
|
Apr. 26
|
July 24
|
Jan. 21
|
Feb. 9
|
Feb. 29
|
Mar. 15
|
Mar. 17
|
Apr. 5
|
May 10
|
Aug. 7
|
Feb. 4
|
Feb. 23
|
Mar. 14
|
Mar. 29
|
Mar. 31
|
Apr. 19
|
May 24
|
Aug. 21
|
Feb. 18
|
Mar. 8
|
Mar. 28
|
Apr. 12
|
Apr. 14
|
May 3
|
June 7
|
Sept. 4
|
Mar. 3
|
Mar. 22
|
Apr. 11
|
Apr. 26
|
Apr. 28
|
May 17
|
June 21
|
Sept. 18
|
Mar. 17
|
Apr. 5
|
Apr. 25
|
May 10
|
May 12
|
May 31
|
July 5
|
Oct. 2
|
Mar. 31
|
Apr. 19
|
May 9
|
May 24
|
May 26
|
June 14
|
July 19
|
Oct. 16
|
Apr. 14
|
May 3
|
May 23
|
June 7
|
June 9
|
June 28
|
Aug. 2
|
Oct. 30
|
Apr. 28
|
May 17
|
June 6
|
June 21
|
June 23
|
July 12
|
Aug. 16
|
Nov. 13
|
May 12
|
May 31
|
June 20
|
July 5
|
July 7
|
July 26
|
Aug. 30
|
Nov. 27
|
May 26
|
June 14
|
July 4
|
July 19
|
July 21
|
Aug. 9
|
Sept. 13
|
Dec. 11
|
June 9
|
June 28
|
July 18
|
Aug. 2
|
Aug. 4
|
Aug. 23
|
Sept. 27
|
Dec. 25
|
June 23
|
July 12
|
Aug. 1
|
Aug. 16
|
Aug. 18
|
Sept. 6
|
Oct. 11
|
Jan. 8 ’01
|
July 7
|
July 26
|
Aug. 15
|
Aug. 30
|
Sept. 1
|
Sept. 20
|
Oct. 25
|
Jan. 22 ’01
|
July 21
|
Aug. 9
|
Aug. 29
|
Sept. 13
|
Sept. 15
|
Oct. 4
|
Nov. 8
|
Feb. 5 ’01
|
Aug. 4
|
Aug. 23
|
Sept. 12
|
Sept. 27
|
Sept. 29
|
Oct. 18
|
Nov. 22
|
Feb. 19 ’01
|
Aug. 18
|
Sept. 6
|
Sept. 26
|
Oct. 11
|
Oct. 13
|
Nov. 1
|
Dec. 6
|
Mar. 5 ’01
|
Sept. 1
|
Sept. 20
|
Oct. 10
|
Oct. 25
|
Oct. 27
|
Nov. 15
|
Dec. 20
|
Mar. 19 ’01
|
Sept. 15
|
Oct. 4
|
Oct. 24
|
Nov. 8
|
Nov. 10
|
Nov. 29
|
Jan. 3 ’01
|
Apr. 2 ’01
|
Sept. 29
|
Oct. 18
|
Nov. 7
|
Nov. 22
|
Nov. 24
|
Dec. 13
|
Jan. 17 ’01
|
Apr. 16 ’01
|
Oct. 13
|
Nov. 1
|
Nov. 21
|
Dec. 6
|
Dec. 8
|
Dec. 27
|
Jan. 31 ’01
|
Apr. 30 ’01
|
Oct. 27
|
Nov. 15
|
Dec. 5
|
Dec. 20
|
Dec. 22
|
Jan. 10 ’01
|
Feb. 14 ’01
|
May 14 ’01
|
Nov. 10
|
Nov. 29
|
Dec. 19
|
Jan. 3 ’01
|
Jan. 5 ’01
|
Jan. 24 ’01
|
Feb. 28 ’01
|
May 28 ’01
|
Nov. 24
|
Dec. 13
|
Jan. 2 ’01
|
Jan. 17 ’01
|
Jan. 19 ’01
|
Feb. 7 ’01
|
Mar. 14 ’01
|
June 11 ’01
|
Dec. 8
|
Dec. 27
|
Jan. 16 ’01
|
Jan. 31 ’01
|
Feb. 2 ’01
|
Feb. 21 ’01
|
Mar. 28 ’01
|
June 25 ’01
|
Dec. 22
|
Jan. 10 ’01
|
Jan. 30 ’01
|
Feb. 14 ’01
|
Feb. 16 ’01
|
Mar. 7 ’01
|
Apr. 11 ’01
|
July 9 ’01
|
Jan. 5 ’01
|
Jan. 24 ’01
|
Feb. 13 ’01
|
Feb. 28 ’01
|
Mar. 2 ’01
|
Mar. 21 ’01
|
Apr. 25 ’01
|
July 23 ’01
|
PRINTING SCHEDULE FOR IAB
|
ISSUE NUMBER
|
SUBMISSION DEADLINE
|
ISSUE DATE
|
22
|
Friday, April 14, 2000
|
May 3, 2000
|
23
|
Friday, April 28, 2000
|
May 17, 2000
|
24
|
Friday, May 12, 2000
|
May 31, 2000
|
PLEASE
NOTE:
Rules will not be accepted after 12 o’clock noon
on the Friday filing deadline days unless prior approval has been received from
the Administrative Rules Coordinator’s office.
If the filing deadline falls on a legal holiday, submissions
made on the following Monday will be accepted.
PUBLICATION PROCEDURES
TO: Administrative Rules Coordinators and Text Processors of
State Agencies
FROM: Kathleen K. Bates, Iowa Administrative Code
Editor
SUBJECT: Publication of Rules in Iowa Administrative
Bulletin
The Administrative Code Division uses Interleaf 6 to publish
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin and can import documents directly from most
other word processing systems, including Microsoft Word, Word for Windows (Word
7 or earlier), and WordPerfect.
1. To facilitate the processing of rule–making
documents, we request a 3.5” High Density (not Double Density) IBM
PC–compatible diskette of the rule making. Please indicate on each
diskette the following information: agency name, file name, format used for
exporting, and chapter(s) amended. Diskettes may be delivered to the
Administrative Code Division, 1st Floor, Lucas State Office Building or included
with the documents submitted to the Governor’s Administrative Rules
Coordinator.
2. Alternatively, if you have Internet E–mail access,
you may send your document as an attachment to an E–mail message,
addressed to both of the following:
bcarr@legis.state.ia.us
kbates@legis.state.ia.us
Please note that changes made prior to publication of the
rule–making documents are reflected on the hard copy returned to agencies
by the Governor’s office, but not on the diskettes; diskettes are returned
unchanged.
Your cooperation helps us print the Bulletin more quickly and
cost–effectively than was previously possible and is greatly
appreciated.
______________________
IOWA ADMINISTRATIVE RULES and IOWA COURT RULES on
CD–ROM
1999 WINTER EDITION
Containing: Iowa Administrative Code (updated through
December 1999)
Iowa Administrative Bulletins (July 1999 through
December 1999)
Iowa Court Rules (updated through December
1999)
For free brochures and order forms contact:
Legislative Service Bureau
Attn: Ms. Stephanie
Cox
State Capitol
Des Moines, Iowa 50319
Telephone:
(515)281–3566 Fax:
(515)281–8027
lsbinfo@legis.state.ia.us
PUBLIC HEARINGS
To All Agencies:
The Administrative Rules Review Committee voted to request
that Agencies comply with Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)“b” by allowing
the opportunity for oral presentation (hearing) to be held at least twenty
days after publication of Notice in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin.
AGENCY
|
HEARING LOCATION
|
DATE AND TIME OF HEARING
|
CORRECTIONS DEPARTMENT[201]
|
|
Private sector employment projects, 37.5 IAB 4/5/00
ARC 9775A
|
Conference Room—2nd Floor 420 Keo Way Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 11 a.m. to 1 p.m.
|
Utilization of offender labor, 37.6 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9776A
|
Conference Room—2nd Floor 420 Keo Way Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 11 a.m. to 1 p.m.
|
EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS BOARD[282]
|
|
Requirements for special education endorsements, 15.1,
15.2 IAB 4/5/00 ARC 9766A
|
Conference Room 3 North—3rd Floor Grimes State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 2 p.m.
|
Paraeducator certificates, ch 22 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9765A
|
Conference Room 3 North—3rd Floor Grimes State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 p.m
|
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
|
|
Appeal procedures, 6.17 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9773A (See also ARC 9774A herein)
|
State Board Room Grimes State Office Bldg. Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 p.m.
|
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
|
|
AEA services under Medicaid, 78.32 IAB 3/22/00 ARC
9738A (See also ARC 9613A, IAB
1/26/00)
|
Conference Room—6th Floor Iowa Bldg., Suite
600 411 3rd St. SE Cedar Rapids, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 10 a.m.
|
|
Administrative Conference Room 417 E. Kanesville
Blvd. Council Bluffs, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 9 a.m.
|
|
Large Conference Room Bicentennial Bldg.—5th
Floor 428 Western Davenport, Iowa
|
April 13, 2000 10 a.m.
|
|
Conference Room 104 City View Plaza 1200
University Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 10 a.m.
|
|
Liberty Room Mohawk Square 22 N. Georgia Ave. Mason
City, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 11 a.m.
|
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
(Cont’d)
|
|
|
Conference Room 3 120 East Main Ottumwa, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 10 a.m.
|
|
Fifth Floor 520 Nebraska St. Sioux City, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 1:30 p.m.
|
|
Conference Rooms 443–445 Pinecrest Office
Bldg. 1407 Independence Ave. Waterloo, Iowa
|
April 12, 2000 10 a.m.
|
INSURANCE DIVISION[191]
|
|
Consumer guide, 35.35 to 35.37 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9756A
|
330 Maple St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 10 a.m.
|
LABOR SERVICES DIVISION[875]
|
|
Asbestos removal and encapsulation, chs 81, 82, 155 IAB
3/22/00 ARC 9741A
|
1000 E. Grand Ave. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 11, 2000 1:30 p.m. (If
requested)
|
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]
|
|
Volunteer safety/education instructor
certification, 15.9 to 15.12 IAB 4/5/00 ARC 9769A
|
Conference Room—4th Floor West Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 2 p.m.
|
General dock permit, 16.1, 16.3 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9768A
|
Conference Room—4th Floor West Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 p.m.
|
Community forestrychallenge grant program, 34.1 to
34.12 IAB 4/5/00 ARC 9770A (See also ARC 9771A
herein)
|
Conference Room—4th Floor East Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 2 p.m.
|
Use of nontoxic shot on wildlife areas, 51.9 IAB 3/8/00
ARC 9720A
|
Auditorium Wallace State Office Bldg. Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 19, 2000 7:30 p.m.
|
Waterfowl and coot hunting, 91.1, 91.3, 91.4(2), 91.5(1),
91.6 IAB 3/8/00 ARC 9719A
|
Auditorium Wallace State Office Bldg. Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 19, 2000 7:30 p.m.
|
Wild turkey fall hunting, 99.2 IAB 3/8/00 ARC
9721A
|
Auditorium Wallace State Office Bldg. Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 19, 2000 7:30 p.m.
|
Deer hunting, 106.1(4), 106.2(4), 106.3(3), 106.4 to
106.6, 106.8 IAB 3/8/00 ARC 9722A
|
Auditorium Wallace State Office Bldg. Des Moines,
Iowa
|
April 19, 2000 7:30 p.m.
|
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE DIVISION[645]
|
|
Optometry examiners, 180.6, 180.12 to 180.18,
180.115; ch 181 IAB 4/5/00 ARC 9767A
|
Board Conference Room—5th Floor Lucas State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 26, 2000 9 to 11 a.m.
|
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]
|
|
Emergency medical services training grants, 130.1,
130.4 IAB 4/5/00 ARC 9758A (ICN Network)
|
National Guard Armory 11 East 23rd St. Spencer,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
|
National Guard Armory 1712 LaClark Rd. Carroll,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
|
National Guard Armory 1160 10th St. SW Mason City,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
|
ICN Room, Sixth Floor Lucas State Office Building Des
Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
|
National Guard Armory 195 Radford Rd. Dubuque,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
|
National Guard Armory 501 Hwy 1 South Washington,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2000 1 to 2 p.m.
|
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
|
|
Special mobile equipment, 410.1 to 410.3 IAB 4/5/00
ARC 9761A
|
Conference Room—Upper Level Park Fair Mall 100
Euclid Ave. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 27, 2000 8 a.m. (If
requested)
|
Motor carrier regulations, 529.1 IAB 4/5/00 ARC
9764A
|
Conference Room—Upper Level Park Fair Mall 100
Euclid Ave. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 27, 2000 10 a.m. (If
requested)
|
AGENCY IDENTIFICATION
NUMBERS
Due to reorganization of state government by 1986 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1245, it was necessary to revise the agency identification numbering
system, i.e., the bracketed number following the agency name.
“Umbrella” agencies and elected officials are set
out below at the left–hand margin in CAPITAL letters.
Divisions (boards, commissions, etc.) are indented and set out
in lowercase type under their statutory “umbrellas.”
Other autonomous agencies which were not included in the
original reorganization legislation as “umbrella” agencies are
included alphabetically in small capitals at the left–hand margin, e.g.,
BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101].
The following list will be updated as changes occur:
AGRICULTURE AND LAND STEWARDSHIP DEPARTMENT[21]
Agricultural Development Authority[25]
Soil Conservation Division[27]
ATTORNEY GENERAL[61]
AUDITOR OF STATE[81]
BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101]
BLIND, DEPARTMENT FOR THE[111]
CITIZENS’ AIDE[141]
CIVIL RIGHTS COMMISSION[161]
COMMERCE DEPARTMENT[181]
Alcoholic Beverages Division[185]
Banking Division[187]
Credit Union Division[189]
Insurance Division[191]
Professional Licensing and Regulation Division[193]
Accountancy Examining Board[193A]
Architectural Examining Board[193B]
Engineering and Land Surveying Examining Board[193C]
Landscape Architectural Examining Board[193D]
Real Estate Commission[193E]
Real Estate Appraiser Examining Board[193F]
Savings and Loan Division[197]
Utilities Division[199]
CORRECTIONS DEPARTMENT[201]
Parole Board[205]
CULTURAL AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[221]
Arts Division[222]
Historical Division[223]
ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT, IOWA DEPARTMENT OF[261]
City Development Board[263]
Iowa Finance Authority[265]
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
Educational Examiners Board[282]
College Student Aid Commission[283]
Higher Education Loan Authority[284]
Iowa Advance Funding Authority[285]
Libraries and Information Services Division[286]
Public Broadcasting Division[288]
School Budget Review Committee[289]
EGG COUNCIL[301]
ELDER AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[321]
EMPOWERMENT BOARD, IOWA[349]
ETHICS AND CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE BOARD,
IOWA[351]
EXECUTIVE COUNCIL[361]
FAIR BOARD[371]
GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]
HUMAN INVESTMENT COUNCIL[417]
HUMAN RIGHTS DEPARTMENT[421]
Community Action Agencies Division[427]
Criminal and Juvenile Justice Planning Division[428]
Deaf Services Division[429]
Persons With Disabilities Division[431]
Latino Affairs Division[433]
Status of African–Americans, Division on
the[434]
Status of Women Division[435]
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS DEPARTMENT[481]
Employment Appeal Board[486]
Foster Care Review Board[489]
Racing and Gaming Commission[491]
State Public Defender[493]
LAW ENFORCEMENT ACADEMY[501]
LIVESTOCK HEALTH ADVISORY
COUNCIL[521]
MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT[541]
Appeal Board, State[543]
City Finance Committee[545]
County Finance Committee[547]
NARCOTICS ENFORCEMENT ADVISORY
COUNCIL[551]
NATIONAL AND COMMUNITY SERVICE, IOWA COMMISSION
ON[555]
NATURAL RESOURCES DEPARTMENT[561]
Energy and Geological Resources Division[565]
Environmental Protection Commission[567]
Natural Resource Commission[571]
Preserves, State Advisory Board[575]
PERSONNEL DEPARTMENT[581]
PETROLEUM UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
FUND
BOARD, IOWA COMPREHENSIVE[591]
PREVENTION OF DISABILITIES POLICY
COUNCIL[597]
PUBLIC DEFENSE DEPARTMENT[601]
Emergency Management Division[605]
Military Division[611]
PUBLIC EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS BOARD[621]
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]
Substance Abuse Commission[643]
Professional Licensure Division[645]
Dental Examiners Board[650]
Medical Examiners Board[653]
Nursing Board[655]
Pharmacy Examiners Board[657]
PUBLIC SAFETY DEPARTMENT[661]
RECORDS COMMISSION[671]
REGENTS BOARD[681]
Archaeologist[685]
REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]
Lottery Division[705]
SECRETARY OF STATE[721]
SEED CAPITAL CORPORATION,
IOWA[727]
SHEEP AND WOOL PROMOTION BOARD,
IOWA[741]
TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY COMMISSION,
IOWA[751]
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
Railway Finance Authority[765]
TREASURER OF STATE[781]
TURKEY MARKETING COUNCIL,
IOWA[787]
UNIFORM STATE LAWS
COMMISSION[791]
VETERANS AFFAIRS COMMISSION[801]
VETERINARY MEDICINE BOARD[811]
VOTER REGISTRATION
COMMISSION[821]
WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT[871]
Labor Services Division[875]
Workers’ Compensation Division[876]
Workforce Development Board and
Workforce Development
Center Administration Division[877]
NOTICES
ARC 9775A
CORRECTIONS
DEPARTMENT[201]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 904.804, the
Department of Corrections hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 37, “Iowa State Industries,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
Proposed rule 37.5(904) outlines the application and approval
processes for private sector employment projects and provides for Iowa Workforce
Development to address and resolve disputes received from anyone who believes
that the private sector work program established by the deputy director of
prison industries has displaced employed workers, applies to skills, crafts, or
trades in which there is a local surplus of labor, or impairs existing contracts
for employment or services.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials
should be sent to Deputy Director of Prison Industries, 420 Keo Way, Des Moines,
Iowa 50309.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, from11 a.m.
to 1 p.m. in the Second Floor Conference Room, 420 Keo Way, Des Moines, Iowa, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements should contact the Department of Corrections and advise of
special needs.
The Department of Corrections approved this amendment on March
3, 2000.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
904.809.
The following amendment is proposed.
Amend 201—Chapter 37 by adopting the following
new rule:
201—37.5(904) Private sector employment
projects.
37.5(1) Definitions.
“Advisory board” means the prison industries
advisory board.
“Deputy director of prison industries” means the
department of corrections deputy director responsible for the
day–to–day operations of prison industries including private sector
individuals.
“Director” means the chief executive officer of
the department of corrections.
“Workforce development board” means the state
workforce development board.
“Workforce development director” means the chief
executive officer of the department of workforce development.
37.5(2) Preapplication requirement. Prior to
submitting an application to the deputy director of prison industries for a
private sector employment project, the employer shall place a job order with a
duration of at least 30 days with the nearest workforce development center. The
job order shall be listed statewide in all centers and on the department of
workforce development’s jobs Internet site.
37.5(3) Employer application.
a. Private sector employers requesting offender labor must
submit the following to the deputy director of prison industries:
1. Work program, including job description;
2. Proposed wage rate;
3. Description of job site;
4. Duration of the work; and
5. Copy of the job order listing with workforce
development.
b. Upon receiving a written proposal to use offenders in a
private sector work program, the deputy director of prison industries shall
provide a copy of the private sector work proposal including job descriptions
and proposed wages to the workforce development director.
c. The deputy director of prison industries shall send a
letter to the department of workforce development requesting verification of the
employer’s 30–day job listing, the average wage rate for the job(s)
the offenders will perform, the current unemployment rate in the county where
the employer is located, and the current employment level of the company that
will employ the offenders.
d. The deputy director of prison industries and
thewarden/superintendent at the proposed institution shall review the proposed
projects with the board of supervisors and the sheriff in the county where the
project will be located.
37.5(4) Verification. The workforce development
director shall verify the employment levels and prevailing wages paid for
similar jobs in the area and provide to the deputy director of prison industries
in writing:
1. Verification of the employer’s 30–day job
listing;
2. The number of qualified applicant referrals and hires made
as a result of the job order;
3. The average wage rate for the proposed job(s);
4. The wage range;
5. The current unemployment rate for the county where the
employer is located; and
6. The current employment levels of the company that will
employ the offenders based upon the most recent quarter for which data is
available.
37.5(5) Prevailing wages. The deputy director of
prison industries shall obtain employment levels in the locale of the proposed
job(s) and the prevailing wages for the job(s) in question from the department
of workforce development prior to authorizing any private sector work program.
The deputy director of prison industries will consider the average wage rate and
wage range from the department of workforce development for the appropriate
geographic area for which occupational wage information is available. The
appropriate geographic area may be statewide.
To reduce possible displacement of civilian workers, the
deputy director of prison industries shall advise prospective employers and
eligible offenders of the following requirements:
1. Offenders shall not be eligible for unemployment
compensation while incarcerated.
2. Before the employer initiates work utilizing offender
labor, the deputy director of prison industries shall provide the baseline
number of jobs as established by the department of workforce
development.
3. In January and July of each year, the deputy director of
prison industries shall receive from the department of workforce development the
actual number of civilian workers by employer and shall compile a
side–by–side comparison for each employer. A copy of the
side–by–side comparison will be provided to the advisory board and
workforce development director semiannually.
37.5(6) Ineligible projects. The deputy director of
prison industries shall evaluate the information from the department of
workforce development to verify nondisplacement of civilian workers. Employment
of offenders in private industry shall not displace employed workers, apply to
skills, crafts, or trades in which there is a local surplus of labor, or impair
existing contracts for employment or services.
37.5(7) Notification. The deputy director of prison
industries shall provide a copy of the private sector work proposal and the
department of workforce development review of the private sector work proposal
to the following:
1. Governor’s office;
2. Speaker of the house;
3. President of the senate;
4. Warden/superintendent at the proposed work site;
5. Local labor organization(s);
6. Director of workforce development; and
7. Department of Justice, Washington D.C.
Within 14 calendar days of receiving the department of
workforce development review, the deputy director of prison industries will
consolidate the recommendations for review and approval by the director of
corrections.
37.5(8) Prison industries advisory board review.
Following approval by the director of corrections, the deputy director of prison
industries shall forward the final proposal to the prison industries advisory
board with the recommendation to approve or disapprove the work program,
including all correspondence from the department of workforce development, the
Department of Justice, and any local official who has offered
comments.
The deputy director of prison industries shall provide written
documentation to the prison industries advisory board confirming that the
proposed work project will not displace civilian workers. If displacement
occurs, the deputy director of prison industries shall advise the private
employer that the employer will be given 30 days to become compliant or the
department of corrections will terminate the use of offender labor.
37.5(9) Disputes. Anyone who believes that the
private sector work program violates this rule shall advise the department of
workforce development. A written complaint may be filed in accordance with
workforce development board rule 877— 1.5(84A). The workforce development
director shall consult with the deputy director of prison industries before the
workforce development board makes a final recommendation(s) to resolve any
complaint.
The deputy director of prison industries will assist the
department of workforce development in compiling all information necessary to
resolve the dispute. The workforce development board shall notify the deputy
director of prison industries and interested parties in writing of the
recommended action to resolve a complaint.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
904.809.
ARC 9776A
CORRECTIONS
DEPARTMENT[201]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 904.701, the
Department of Corrections hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 37, “Iowa State Industries,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
Proposed new rule 37.6(904) establishes application procedures
for employers wishing to use offender labor in construction or maintenance
projects. This rule provides that the Workforce Development Department shall
address and resolve disputes from anyone who believes that employers utilizing
offender labor while working under contract with the state of Iowa have
displaced employed workers, have employed offenders in skills, crafts, or trades
in which there is a local surplus of labor, or have impaired existing contracts
for employment or services.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed rule on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials should
be sent to Deputy Director of Prison Industries, 420 Keo Way, Des Moines, Iowa
50309.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, from11 a.m.
to 1 p.m. in the Second Floor Conference Room, 420 Keo Way, Des Moines, Iowa, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements should contact the Department of Corrections and advise of
special needs.
The Department of Corrections approved this rule on March 3,
2000.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
904.701.
The following amendment is proposed.
Amend 201—Chapter 37 by adopting the following
new rule:
201—37.6(904) Utilization of offender labor in
construction and maintenance projects.
37.6(1) Definitions.
“Director” means the chief executive officer of
the department of corrections.
“Employer” means a contractor or subcontractor
providing maintenance or construction services under contract to the department
of corrections or under the department of general services.
“Workforce development director” means the chief
executive officer of the Iowa department of workforce development.
37.6(2) Scope. Utilization of offender labor applies
only to contractors or subcontractors providing construction or maintenance
services to the department of corrections. The contract authority for providing
construction or maintenance services may be the department of general
services.
37.6(3) Employer application. Employers working under
contract with the state of Iowa may submit an application to the department of
corrections to employ offenders. Requests for such labor shall not include work
release offenders assigned to community–based corrections under Iowa Code
chapter 905.
a. Prior to submitting an application, the employer will place
with the nearest workforce development center a job order with a duration of at
least 30 days. The job order will be listed statewide in all centers and on the
department of workforce development’s jobs Internet site.
b. The employer’s application shall include:
1. Scope of work, including type of work and required number
of workers;
2. Proposed wage rate;
3. Location;
4. Duration; and
5. Reason for utilizing offender labor.
c. The department of corrections shall verify through the
department of workforce development the employer’s 30–day job
listing, the average wage rate for the job(s) the offenders will perform, the
current unemployment rate in the county where the employer is located, and the
current employment level of the employer that will employ the
offenders.
37.6(4) Verification. The director of workforce
development shall verify the employment levels and prevailing wages paid for
similar jobs in the area and provide to the director, in writing:
1. Verification of the employer’s 30–day job
listing;
2. The number of qualified applicant referrals and hires made
as a result of the job order;
3. The average wage rate for the proposed job(s);
4. The wage range;
5. The prevailing wage as determined by the U.S. Department of
Labor;
6. The current unemployment rate for the county where the
employer is located;
7. The current employment levels of the employer that will
employ the offenders based upon the most recent quarter for which data is
available.
37.6(5) Safety training. The employer shall document
that all offenders employed in construction and maintenance projects receive a
10–hour OSHA safety course provided free of charge by the department of
workforce development.
37.6(6) Prevailing wages. The director will not
authorize an employer to employ offenders in hard labor programs without
obtaining from the department of workforce development employment levels in the
locale of the proposed jobs and the prevailing wages for the jobs in question.
The average wage rate and wage range from the department of workforce
development will be based on the appropriate geographic area for which
occupational wage information is available. The appropriate geographic area may
be statewide.
To reduce any potential displacement of civilian workers, the
director shall advise prospective employers and eligible offenders of the
following requirements:
1. Offenders will not be eligible for unemployment
compensation while incarcerated.
2. Before the employer initiates work utilizing offender
labor, the director shall provide the baseline number of jobs as established by
the department of workforce development.
3. If the contract to employ offender labor exceeds six
months, the director shall request and receive from the workforce development
director the average wage rates and wage ranges for jobs currently held by
offenders and current employment levels of employers employing offenders and
shall compile a side–by–side comparison of each employer.
37.6(7) Disputes. Anyone who believes that the
employer’s application violates this rule shall present concerns in
writing to the workforce development board. A written complaint may be filed
with the workforce development board for any dispute arising from the
implementation of the employer’s application in accordance with the
workforce development board’s rule 877—1.6(84A). The workforce
development board shall consult with the director prior to making
recommendations. The director will assist the workforce development board in
compiling all information necessary to resolve the dispute. The workforce
development board shall notify the director and interested parties in writing of
the corrective action plan to resolve the dispute.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
904.701.
ARC 9766A
EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS
BOARD[282]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 272.2, the
Board of Educational Examiners hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 15, “Requirements for Special Education Endorsements,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
The purpose of these amendments is to clarify the educational
requirements for student teaching in special education endorsement programs,
thereby providing more options for the acceptance of out–of–state
preparation experience; to modify the student teaching or practicum requirements
for adding an instructional special education endorsement to an existing
license, thereby eliminating the requirement for multiple student teaching or
practicum experiences at the same instructional level; to eliminate the dual
student teaching experience required for the “mild/moderate mental
disabilities” endorsement; to clarify the name of the endorsement for
those serving “severe and profound” students; and to provide another
option for the issuance of the “multicategorical”
endorsement.
The Board has documented the need for these amendments through
its practical work with applicants from out–of–state institutions
and with current classroom teachers of special education seeking to add new
endorsements to their existing licenses.
There will be a public hearing on the proposed amendments at 2
p.m. on April 25, 2000, in Conference Room 3 North, Third Floor, Grimes State
Office Building, East 14th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa. Persons may
present their views at the public hearing orally or in writing. Persons who
wish to make oral presentations at the public hearing may contact the Executive
Director, Board of Educational Examiners, Grimes State Office Building, East
14th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0147, or at (515)
281–5849, prior to the date of the public hearing.
Any interested person may make written comments or suggestions
on the proposed amendments by 4:30 p.m. on April 26, 2000. Written comments and
suggestions should be addressed to Dr. Anne E. Kruse, Executive Director, Board
of Educational Examiners, at the above address.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
272.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule 282—15.1(272) as
follows:
282—15.1(272) Program requirements for
special Special education teaching endorsements.
15.1(1) Program requirements.
1 a. Baccalaureate or master’s
degree from a regionally accredited institution.
2 b. Completion of an approved human
relations component.
3 c. Professional education core:
completed coursework or evidence of competency in:
(1) Structure of American education.
(2) Philosophies of education.
(3) Professional ethics and legal
responsibilities.
(4) Psychology of teaching.
(5) Audiovisual/media/computer technology.
(6) Human growth and development related to the grade
level endorsement desired.
(7) Completion of pre–student teaching
field–based experiences in special education.
d. Student teaching. Each applicant for an Iowa license
with a special education instructional endorsement must file evidence of
completing an approved student teaching program in special education. This
experience must be full–time in an approved special education classroom.
An approved special education classroom is one which is recognized by the state
in terms of the respective state rules for special education.
This special education student teaching experience shall
qualify for each special education instructional endorsement sought on an
original application for Iowa licensure if at the same grade
level.
15.1(2) Adding special education
instructional endorsements to Iowa licenses. After the issuance of a
practitioner license, an individual may add other special education
instructional endorsements to that license upon proper application provided
current requirements for the endorsement(s) have been met. However, if an
applicant is seeking to add a special education instructional endorsement at the
same level, elementary or secondary, as other endorsements held, the student
teaching component set out in the rules for added endorsement areas is not
required.
However, if the applicant seeks to add an endorsement at a
different level, that is, from elementary to secondary or from secondary to
elementary, the required student teaching at the other level must be
completed.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 15.2(2) as
follows:
15.2(2) Mental disabilities: mild/moderate.
a. Prekindergarten–kindergarten mental disabilities.
Meet the requirements for early childhood—special education. Refer to
15.2(9).
b. K–6 mental disabilities: mild/moderate.
(1) K–12 introduction/characteristics of mental
disabilities to include the etiology of the disability, a historical perspective
of its treatment, an overview of current trends in the treatment of the
disability, and a study of the impact of the disability on the child and
family.
(2) K–6 curriculum, methods and materials course for
students with mild mental disabilities (to include the concepts of
career–vocational education, transition, and integration).
(3) K–12 functional, age–appropriate, longitudinal
curriculum development (life skills) course for students with moderate mental
disabilities which should include:
1. Assessment and evaluation.
2. Instructional methodology.
3. Integration and social interactions in regular schools and
community environments.
4. Transition process from school to community
environments.
5. Career–vocational programming.
(4) A course of a general survey nature in the area of
exceptional children.
(5) A course or courses in the collection and use of academic
and behavioral data for the educational diagnosis, assessment and evaluation of
special education pupils which should include:
1. Norm–referenced instruments (including behavioral
rating measures).
2. Criterion–referenced instruments.
3. Ecological assessment techniques.
4. Systematic observation.
5. Individual trait or personality assessments.
6. Social functioning data.
7. Application of assessment results to individualized program
development and management.
(6) Coursework or evidence of competency in:
1. Individual behavioral management, behavioral change
strategies, and classroom management.
2. Methods and strategies for working with parents, regular
classroom teachers, support services personnel, paraprofessionals, and other
individuals involved in the educational program.
(7) K–6 student teaching in a mild or in a
moderate mental disabilities categorical program.
(8) K–6 student teaching in moderate mental
disabilities categorical program.
There must be a student teaching experience with both
mildly and moderately handicapped students; however, one practicum may be
completed if the experiences and responsibilities are comparable to student
teaching.
c. 7–12 mental disabilities: mild/moderate.
(1) Same as K–6 mental disabilities except that the mild
methods and the mild or moderate student teaching must be
completed at the 7–12 level instead of K–6.
(2) A course in career–vocational programming for
special education students.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 15.2(3) as
follows:
15.2(3) Mental disabilities:
moderate/severe/ and profound. The
holder of this endorsement is authorized to teach students with
moderate, severe and profound multiple handicaps from age 5 to
age 21 (and to a maximum allowable age in accordance with Iowa Code section
256B.8).
a. Prekindergarten–kindergarten mental disabilities.
Meet the requirements for early childhood—special education. Refer to
15.2(9).
b. K–12 mental disabilities:
moderate/severe/ and
profound.
(1) K–12 introduction/characteristics of mental
disabilities to include the etiology of the disability, a historical perspective
of its treatment, an overview of current trends in the treatment of the
disability, and a study of the impact of the disability on the child and
family.
(2) K–12 functional, age–appropriate,
longitudinal curriculum development (life skills) course for students with
moderate mental disabilities which should include:
1. Assessment and evaluation.
2. Instructional methodology.
3. Integration and social interactions in regular
schools and community environments.
4. Transition process from school to community
environments.
5. Career–vocational
programming.
(3) (2) K–12 functional,
age–appropriate, longitudinal cur–riculum development (life skills)
course for students with severe/ and profound multiple
handicaps which should include:
1. Assessment and evaluation.
2. Instructional methodology covering adaptations and the
concept of partial participation.
3. Integration and social interactions in regular schools and
community environments.
4. Transition process from school to community
environments.
5. Career–vocational programming.
(4) (3) A course of a general survey
nature in the area of exceptional children.
(5) (4) Coursework or evidence of
competency in:
1. Individual behavioral management, behavioral change
strategies, and classroom strategies.
2. Methods and strategies for working with parents, regular
classroom teachers, support services personnel, paraprofessionals, and other
individuals involved in the educational program.
(6) K–6 or 7–12 student teaching with
students who experience moderate mental disabilities.
(7) (5) K–6 or 7–12
student teaching experience with students with severe/
and profound multiple handicaps.
There must be a student teaching experience with both
moderate and severe/profound multiply handicapped students; however, one
practicum may be completed if the experiences and responsibilities are
comparable to student teaching.
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 15.2(8) as
follows:
15.2(8) Multicategorical resource teacher—mildly
handicapped.
a. Option 1—K–6 multicategorical resource.
The holder of this endorsement must meet the requirements to serve as a teacher
of the nonhandicapped. See rule 282—14.18(272).
(1) A K–12 introductory course for providing educational
services to the mildly disabled youngsters in multicategorical programs which
should include current trends and issues for serving these youngsters, basic
theoretical and practical approaches, educational alternatives, implication of
federal and state statutes and related services, and the importance of the
multidisciplinary team in providing more appropriate educational
programming.
(2) A K–6 methods and strategies course which includes
numerous models for providing curricular and instructional methodologies
utilized in the education of the mildly handicapped.
(3) Two strategy courses chosen from the following
list:
1. A methods course for mental disabilities.
2. A methods course for learning disabilities.
3. A methods course for behavioral disorders.
4. A course in remedial reading.
5. A course in remedial mathematics.
(4) A course of a general survey nature in the area of
exceptional children.
(5) A course or courses in the collection and use of academic
and behavioral data for the educational diagnosis, assessment, and evaluation of
special education pupils which should include:
1. Norm–referenced instruments (including behavioral
rating measures).
2. Criterion–referenced instruments.
3. Ecological assessment techniques.
4. Systematic observation.
5. Individual trait or personality assessments.
6. Social functioning data.
7. Application of assessment results to individualized program
development and management.
(6) Coursework or evidence of competency in:
1. Individual behavioral management, behavioral change
strategies, and classroom management.
2. Methods and strategies for working with parents, support
services personnel, regular classroom teachers, paraprofessionals, and other
individuals involved in the educational program.
(7) Student teaching in a K–6 multicategorical resource
room—mildly handicapped.
b. Option 1—7–12 multicategorical
resource.
(1) The holder of this endorsement must meet the requirements
to serve as a teacher of the nonhandicapped. See rule
282—14.18(272).
(2) Same as K–6 except that student teaching and the
instructional strategies course for the multicategorical resource room must be
7–12 instead of K–6.
(3) A course in career–vocational programming for
special education students.
c. Option 2—K–6 multicategorical resource. To
obtain this endorsement, the applicant must hold a valid Iowa license with
either a K–6 or 7–12 special education instructional endorsement and
must meet the following basic requirements in addition to those set out above in
15.2(8)“a”(1) through (7).
(1) Child growth and development with emphasis on the
emotional, physical, and mental characteristics of elementary age children,
unless completed as part of the professional education core. See
282—subrule 14.19(3).
(2) Methods of and materials for teaching elementary
language arts.
(3) Remedial reading.
(4) Elementary curriculum methods and materials, unless
completed as part of another elementary level endorsement program (e.g.,
282—subrule 14.20(2), 14.20(3), or 14.20(12) or a similar elementary
endorsement program).
(5) Methods of and materials for teaching elementary
mathematics.
d. Option 2—7–12 multicategorical resource. To
obtain this endorsement, the applicant must hold a valid Iowa license with
either a K–6 or 7–12 special education instructional endorsement and
must meet the following basic requirements in addition to those set out above in
15.2(8)“a”(1) through (6).
(1) Adolescent growth and development with emphasis on the
emotional, physical, and mental characteristics of adolescent age children,
unless completed as part of the professional education core. See
282—subrule 14.19(3).
(2) Adolescent literacy or secondary content area
reading.
(3) Secondary or adolescent reading diagnosis and
remediation.
(4) Methods of and materials for teaching adolescents with
mathematics difficulties or mathematics for the second–ary level learning
disabilities teacher.
(5) Secondary methods unless completed as part of the
professional education core. See 282—subrule 14.19(3).
(6) Student teaching and the instructional strategies
course for the multicategorical resource room must be 7–12 instead of
K–6.
(7) A course in career–vocational programming for
special education students.
ARC 9765A
EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS
BOARD[282]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 272.2, the
Board of Educational Examiners hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to adopt a
new Chapter 22, “Paraeducator Certificates,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
This new chapter is intended to implement Iowa Code section
272.6, which requires the Board of Educational Examiners to adopt rules pursuant
to Iowa Code chapter 17A relating to a multi–level voluntary licensing
system ranging from paraeducator generalist to paraeducator
specialist.
There will be a public hearing on the proposed new rules at 1
p.m., April 25, 2000, in Conference Room 3 North, Third Floor, Grimes State
Office Building, East 14th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa. Persons may
present their views at the public hearing orally or in writing. Persons who
wish to make oral presentation at the public hearing may contact the Executive
Director, Board of Educational Examiners, Grimes State Office Building, East
14th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0147, or at
(515)281–5849, prior to the date of the public hearing.
Any interested person may make written comments or suggestions
on the proposed rules until 4:30 p.m. on Wednesday, April 26, 2000. Written
comments and suggestions should be addressed to Dr. Anne E. Kruse, Executive
Director, Board of Educational Examiners, at the above address.
These proposed rules are intended to implement Iowa Code
section 272.6.
The following new rules are proposed:
CHAPTER 22
PARAEDUCATOR CERTIFICATES
282—22.1(272) Paraeducator certificates. Iowa
paraeducator certificates are issued upon application filed on a form provided
by the board of educational examiners.
282—22.2(272) Approved paraeducator certificate
programs. An applicant for an initial paraeducator certificate who
completes the paraeducator preparation program from a recognized Iowa
paraeducator approved program shall have the recommendation from the designated
certifying official at the recognized area education agency, local education
agency, community college, or institution of higher education where the
preparation was completed. A recognized Iowa paraeducator approved program is
one which has its program of preparation approved by the state board of
education according to standards established by the board.
282—22.3(272) Issue date on original
certificate. A certificate is valid only from and after the date of
issuance.
282—22.4(272) Validity. The paraeducator
certificate shall be valid for five years.
282—22.5(272) Certificate fee.
22.5(1) Issuance of certificates. The fee for the
issuance of the paraeducator certificate shall be $25.
22.5(2) Adding areas of concentration. The fee for
the addition of each area of concentration to a paraeducator certificate,
following the issuance of the initial paraeducator certificate and any area(s)
of concentration, shall be $10.
282—22.6(272) Prekindergarten through grade
12paraeducator generalist certificate.
22.6(1) Applicants must possess a minimum of a high
school diploma or a graduate equivalent diploma.
22.6(2) Applicants shall be disqualified for any of
the following reasons:
a. The applicant is less than 21 years of age.
b. The applicant has been convicted of child abuse or sexual
abuse of a child.
c. The applicant has been convicted of a felony.
d. The applicant’s application is fraudulent.
e. The applicant’s certification from another state is
suspended or revoked.
f. The applicant fails to meet board standards for application
for an initial or renewed certificate.
22.6(3) Qualifications or criteria for the granting or
revocation of a certificate or the determination of an individual’s
professional standing shall not include membership or nonmembership in any
teacher or paraeducator organization.
22.6(4) Applicants shall have successfully completed
at least 90 clock hours of training in the areas of behavior management,
exceptional child and at–risk child behavior, collaboration skills,
interpersonal relations skills, child and youth development, technology, and
ethical responsibilities and behavior.
22.6(5) Applicants shall have successfully completed
the following list of competencies so that, under the direction and supervision
of a qualified classroom teacher, the paraeducator will be able to:
a. Support a safe, positive teaching and learning environment
including the following competencies:
(1) Follow prescribed health, safety, and emergency school and
classroom policy and procedures.
(2) As directed, prepare and organize materials to support
teaching and learning.
(3) Use strategies and techniques for facilitating the
integration of individuals with diverse learning needs in various
settings.
(4) Assist with special health services.
(5) Assist in adapting instructional strategies and materials
according to the needs of the learner.
(6) Assist in gathering and recording data about the
performance and behavior of individuals.
(7) Assist in maintaining a motivational
environment.
(8) Assist in various instructional arrangements (e.g., large
group, small group, tutoring).
b. Assist in the development of physical and intellectual
development including the following competencies:
(1) Assist with the activities and opportunities that
encourage curiosity, exploration, and problem–solving that are appropriate
to the development levels and needs of all children.
(2) Actively communicate with children and provide
opportunities and support for children to understand, acquire, and use verbal
and nonverbal means of communicating thoughts and feelings.
(3) Actively communicate and support high expectations that
are shared, clearly defined and appropriate.
(4) Make and document observations appropriate to the
individual with specific learning needs.
(5) Use strategies that promote the learner’s
independence.
(6) Assist in monitoring progress and providing feedback to
the appropriate person.
c. Support social, emotional, and behavioral development
including the following competencies:
(1) Provide a supportive environment in which all children,
including children with disabilities and children at risk of school failure, can
begin to learn and practice appropriate and acceptable behaviors as individuals
and groups.
(2) Assist in developing and teaching specific behaviors and
procedures that facilitate safety and learning in each unique school
setting.
(3) Assist in the implementation of individualized behavior
management plans, including behavior intervention plans for students with
disabilities.
(4) Model and assist in teaching appropriate behaviors as a
response to inappropriate behaviors.
(5) Use appropriate strategies and techniques in a variety of
settings to assist in the development of social skills.
(6) Assist in modifying the learning environment to manage
behavior.
d. Establish positive and productive relations including the
following competencies:
(1) Demonstrate a commitment to a team approach to
interventions.
(2) Maintain an open, friendly, and cooperative relationship
with each child’s family, sharing information in a positive and productive
manner.
(3) Communicate with colleagues, follow instructions and use
problem–solving skills that will facilitate working as an effective member
of the school team.
(4) Foster respectful and beneficial relationships between
families and other school and community personnel.
(5) Function in a manner that demonstrates a positive regard
for the distinctions among roles and responsibilities of paraprofessionals,
professionals, and other support personnel.
e. Integrate effectively the technology to support student
learning including the following competencies:
(1) Establish the environment for the successful use of
educational technology.
(2) Support and strengthen technology planning and
integration.
(3) Improve support systems for technical
integration.
(4) Operate computers and use technology
effectively.
f. Practice ethical and professional standards of conduct on
an ongoing basis including the following competencies:
(1) Demonstrate a commitment to share information in a
confidential manner.
(2) Demonstrate a willingness to participate in ongoing staff
development and self–evaluation, and apply constructive
feedback.
(3) Abide by the criteria of professional practice and rules
of the board of educational examiners.
22.6(6) An applicant for a certificate under these
rules shall demonstrate that the requirements of the certificate have been met
and the burden of proof shall be on the applicant.
282—22.7(272) Paraeducator area of
concentration. An area of concentration is not required, but optional.
Applicants must currently hold or have previously held an Iowaparaeducator
generalist certificate. Applicants may complete one or more areas of
concentration, but must complete at least 45 clock hours in each area of
concentration.
22.7(1) Early childhood—prekindergarten through
grade 3. The paraeducator shall successfully complete the following list of
competencies so that under the direction and supervision of a qualified
classroom teacher, the paraeducator will be able to:
a. Reinforce skills, strategies, and activities involving
individuals or small groups.
b. Participate as a member of the team responsible for
developing service plans and educational objectives for parents and their
children.
c. Listen to and communicate with parents in order to gather
information for the service delivery team.
d. Demonstrate knowledge of services provided by health care
providers, social services, education agencies, and other support systems
available to support parents and provide them with the strategies required to
gain access to these services.
e. Demonstrate effective strategies and techniques to
stimulate cognitive, physical, social, and language development in the
student.
f. Gather information as instructed by the classroom teacher
about the performance of individual children and their behaviors, including
observing, recording, and charting, and share information with professional
colleagues.
g. Communicate and work effectively with parents and other
primary caregivers.
22.7(2) Special needs—prekindergarten through
grade 12. The paraeducator shall successfully complete the following list of
competencies so that under the direction and supervision of a qualified
classroom teacher, the paraeducator will be able to:
a. Understand and implement the goals and objectives in an
individualized education plan (IEP).
b. Demonstrate an understanding of the value of serving
children and youth with disabilities and special needs in inclusive
settings.
c. Assist in the instruction of students in academic subjects
using lesson plans and instructional strategies developed by teachers and other
professional support staff.
d. Gather and maintain data about the performance and behavior
of individual students and confer with special and general education
practitioners about student schedules, instructional goals, progress, and
performance.
e. Use appropriate instructional procedures and reinforcement
techniques.
f. Operate computers, use assistive technology and adaptive
equipment that will enable students with special needs to participate more fully
in general education.
22.7(3) English as a second
language—prekindergarten through grade 12. The paraeducator shall
successfully complete the following list of competencies so that, under the
direction and supervision of a qualified classroom teacher, the paraeducator
will be able to:
a. Operate computers and use technology that will enable
students to participate effectively in the classroom.
b. Work with the classroom teacher as collaborative
partners.
c. Demonstrate knowledge of the role and use of primary
language of instruction in accessing English for academic purposes.
d. Demonstrate knowledge of instructional methodologies for
second language acquisition.
e. Communicate and work effectively with parents or guardians
of English as a second language students in their primary language.
f. Demonstrate knowledge of appropriate translation and
interpretation procedures.
22.7(4) Career and transitional programs—grades
5 through 12. The paraeducator shall successfully complete the following list
of competencies so that, under the direction and supervision of a qualified
classroom teacher, the para–educator will be able to:
a. Assist in the implementation of career and transitional
programs.
b. Assist in the implementation of appropriate behavior
management strategies for career and transitional students and those students
who may have special needs.
c. Assist in the implementation of assigned performance and
behavior assessments including observation, recording, and charting for career
and transitional students and those students who may have special
needs.
d. Provide training at job sites using appropriate
instructional interventions.
e. Participate in pre–employment, employment, or
transitional training in classrooms or at off–campus sites.
f. Communicate effectively with employers and employees at
work sites, and personnel or members of the public in other transitional
learning environments.
282—22.8 to 22.11 Reserved.
282—22.12(272) Prekindergarten through grade 12
advanced paraeducator certificate. Applicants for the prekindergarten
through grade 12 advanced paraeducator certificate shall have met the following
requirements:
22.12(1) Currently hold or have previously held an
Iowa paraeducator generalist certificate.
22.12(2) Possess an associate’s degree or have
earned 62 semester hours of college coursework from a regionally accredited
institution of higher education.
22.12(3) Complete a minimum of two semester hours of
coursework involving at least 100 clock hours of a supervised practicum with
children and youth. These two semester hours of practicum may be part of an
associate degree or part of the earned 62 semester hours of college
coursework.
282—22.13(272) Renewal requirements. The
paraeducator certificate may be renewed upon application, a $25 renewal fee, and
verification of successful completion of coursework totaling three units in any
combination listed below.
1. One unit may be earned through a planned staff development
renewal course related to paraeducators in accordance with guidelines approved
by the board of educational examiners.
2. One unit may be earned for each semester hour of college
credit.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
272.6.
ARC 9773A
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
State Board of Education hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter
6, “Appeal Procedures,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments implement Iowa Code chapter 17A contested
case appeal procedures of a proposed decision.
No waiver provision is included because the Board of Education
has adopted agencywide waiver rules.
Any interested person may submit oral or written suggestions
or comments on or before April 25, 2000, by addressing them to Susan Anderson,
Administrative Law Judge, Department of Education, Grimes State Office Building,
Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0146, telephone (515)281–5295.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, at 1 p.m. in
the State Board Room, Grimes State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa, at which
persons may present their views orally and in writing.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
17A.4 and 290.1.
These amendments were also Adopted and Filed Emergency and are
published herein as ARC 9774A. The content of that submission is
incorporated by reference.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
COMMISSION[567]
and
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Public Meetings
At the direction of the Governor, the Department of Natural
Resources is embarking on a department–wide project to review
administrative rules. The goal is to present rules that are
up–to–date, meet present and future needs, are plain–spoken
and direct and are necessary to carry out the laws of Iowa and the federally
mandated programs.
This notice is intended to offer the opportunity to comment
orally, in writing or electronically on Department rules. We will begin holding
public meetings in April for the following rule groupings at the dates, times,
and locations indicated. Comments on these rule groupings may be presented at
these meetings, by mail or electronically, by April 30 to be considered in this
review process. Written comments should be directed to the contact person
listed below, Department of Natural Resources, Wallace State Office Building,
502 East Ninth Street, Des Moines, Iowa 50309.
To file comments electronically, to see the Department rules
review plan, and for updates on the progress of the rules review project, please
use the Department Web site: www.state.ia.us/dnr/ruleshtml.htm. Other
Department program areas will be holding public meetings in May and
June.
Air Quality
Contact: Corey McCoid, (515)281–6061, fax (515)
242–5094
April 10, 4 p.m., Air Quality Bureau, 7900 Hickman Road,
Urbandale
April 13, 6 p.m., Public Library, 123 South Linn Street, Iowa
City
April 18, 6 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, 906
Sunnyside Lane, Atlantic
April 25, 6:30 p.m., Public Library, 225 2nd Street SE, Mason
City
Solid Waste and Waste Management
Contacts: Lavoy Haage, (515)281–4968, fax (515)
281–8895; Brian Tormey, (515)281–8927, fax (515)
281–8895
April 6, 2 p.m., Wallace State Office Building, 5th Floor
Conference Room, 502 East Ninth Street, Des Moines
April 11, 6 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, Room 101,
906 Sunnyside Lane, Atlantic
April 12, 6 p.m., University of Iowa Oakdale Campus, Oakdale
Hall Auditorium, I–80 Exit 240 North
April 13, 6 p.m., North Iowa Area Community College,
Muse–Norris Complex, Room 180A, Mason City
Hazardous Conditions and Standards for Cleanup of
Contaminated Property
Contact: Lambert Nnadi, (515)281–4117, fax (515)
281–8895
April 10, 6 p.m., Public Library, 225 2nd Street SE, Mason
City
April 12, 6 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, 906
Sunnyside Lane, Atlantic
April 17, 6 p.m., University of Iowa Oakdale Campus, Oakdale
Hall, Room 118, I–80 Exit 240 North
April 20, 3:30 p.m., Wallace State Office Building Auditorium,
502 East Ninth Street, Des Moines
Underground Storage Tanks
Contact: Paul Nelson, (515)281–8779, fax (515)
281–8895
April 10, 4 p.m., Wallace State Office Building, 5th Floor
Conference Room, 502 East Ninth Street, Des Moines
April 12, 4 p.m., Public Library, 123 South Linn Street, Iowa
City
April 18, 4 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, 906
Sunnyside Lane, Atlantic
April 25, 4 p.m., Public Library, 225 2nd Street SE, Mason
City
Fisheries, Wildlife and Law
Enforcement
Contact: Randy Edwards, (515)281–6154, fax (515)
281–6794
ICN meetings being held simultaneously on April 13,6:30 p.m.
in Ankeny, Carroll, Clear Lake, Council Bluffs, Creston, Decorah, Dubuque, Iowa
City, Ottumwa, Sioux City, and Spencer. Please call for exact
locations.
Parks, Recreation and Preserves
Contact: Arnie Sohn, (515)281–5814, fax
(515)281–6794
May 4, 7 p.m., University of Iowa Oakdale Campus, Oakdale
Hall, Gold Room, I–80 Exit 240 North
May 11, 7 p.m., Public Library, 225 2nd Street SE, Mason
City
May 17, 7 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, 906 Sunnyside
Lane, Atlantic
May 25, 7 p.m., Wallace State Office Building Auditorium, 502
East Ninth Street, Des Moines
Forests and Prairies
Contact: Jim Bulman, (515)281–5441, fax (515)
281–6794
June 5, 5 p.m., University of Iowa Oakdale Campus, Oakdale
Hall, Gold Room, I–80 Exit 240 North
June 6, 5 p.m., North Iowa Area Community College,
Muse–Norris Complex, Room 180D, Mason City
June 13, 5 p.m., Iowa Western Community College, 906 Sunnyside
Lane, Atlantic
June 15, 4 p.m., DNR Air Quality Building, 7900 Hickman Road,
Urbandale
ARC 9748A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1213,
section 9, the Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 25,
“Disability Services Management,” appearing in the Iowa
Administrative Code.
The Seventy–seventh General Assembly, in 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1213, section 8, subsection 3, established a risk pool fund to be used
to cover an unanticipated cost in excess of a county’s current fiscal year
budget amount for the mental health, mental retardation, and developmental
disabilities services fund. Basic eligibility requires a projected need in
excess of the sum of 105 percent of the county’s current fiscal year
budget amount and any amount of the county’s prior fiscal year accrual
ending services fund balance in excess of 25 percent of the county’s gross
expenditures from the services fund in the prior fiscal year.
A Risk Pool Board was also established consisting of two
county supervisors, two county auditors, a member of the state–county
management committee created in Iowa Code section 331.438 who was not appointed
by the Iowa State Association of Counties, a member of the county finance
committee created in Iowa Code chapter 333A who is not an elected official, and
two single entry point process administrators, all appointed by the Governor,
subject to confirmation by two–thirds of the members of the Senate, and
one member appointed by the director of the Department of Human Services.
Members of the Board were appointed by the Governor in October of 1999 and their
names submitted to the Senate in November of 1999. The Board held its first
meeting in January of 2000.
Any county wishing to receive assistance from the risk pool
must apply to the Risk Pool Board by April 1. The legislature appropriated $2
million for the fund for fiscal year 2000 and $2 million for fiscal year 2001.
The total amount of risk pool assistance to counties shall be limited to the
amount available in the risk pool for a fiscal year. If the total amount of
eligible assistance exceeds the amount available in the risk pool, the amount of
assistance paid shall be prorated among the counties eligible for assistance.
There are provisions for repaying the risk pool funds under specified
conditions.
These rules establish the Risk Pool Board to administer the
risk pool fund established by the legislature and the requirements for counties
to receive assistance from the fund.
These rules do not provide for waivers in specified situations
because the requirements for composition of the risk pool and Risk Pool Board,
eligibility for funds, and for awarding and repayment of funds are all stated in
the Iowa Code. These requirements cannot be waived by rule.
The substance of these rules is also Adopted and Filed
Emergency and is published herein as ARC 9749A. The purpose of this
Notice is to solicit comment on that submission, the subject matter of which is
incorporated by reference.
Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and
arguments thereto received by the Office of Policy Analysis, Department of Human
Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0114, on or
before April 26, 2000.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
426B.5, subsection 3.
ARC 9750A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 234.6,
239B.4(4), and 249A.4, the Department of Human Services proposes to amend
Chapter 41, “Granting Assistance,” Chapter 65,
“Administration,” and Chapter 75, “Conditions of
Eligibility,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
The United States Department of Agriculture has notified the
Department of Human Services that the Department has the option of exempting,
for food stamp purposes, the earnings of persons who are temporarily employed by
the Bureau of the Census during the period from April 1, 2000, through January
31, 2001. The United States Department of Agriculture is allowing this
exemption at the request of the Bureau of the Census as an incentive for persons
to take census employment. The Department of Human Services has decided to take
this option and exempt census income for food stamp recipients.
The Department has made the decision to also exempt the census
income for the Family Investment Program, the Family Medical Assistance Program,
and for FMAP–related Medicaid programs to match food stamp
policy.
These amendments do not provide for waiver in specified
situations because federal food stamp law does not allow for any waivers and
these amendments only provide additional benefits.
The substance of these amendments is also Adopted and Filed
Emergency and is published herein as ARC 9751A. The purpose of this
Notice is to solicit comment on that submission, the subject matter of which is
incorporated by reference.
Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and
arguments thereto received by the Office of Policy Analysis, Department of Human
Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0114, on or
before April 26, 2000.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
234.12, 239B.2(2), 239B.7, and 249A.4.
ARC 9756A
INSURANCE DIVISION[191]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 505.8 and Iowa
Code Supplement section 514K.1, the Insurance Division gives Notice of Intended
Action to amend Chapter 35, “Accident and Health Insurance,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
The proposed amendment sets forth the types of information to
be collected by the Division from health maintenance organizations and insurers
using a preferred provider arrangement for the purpose of publishing a consumer
guide. The amendment also provides for the annual filing of the information and
the form in which it shall be filed with the Division.
Any person may make written comments on the proposed rules on
or before April 25, 2000. These comments should be directed to Rosanne Mead,
Assistant Commissioner, Insurance Division, 330 Maple Street, Des Moines, Iowa
50319. Comments may also be transmitted by E–mail
torosanne.mead@comm6.state.ia.us or by fax to (515)
281–5692.
A public hearing will be held at 10 a.m. on April 25, 2000, at
the offices of the Insurance Division, 330 Maple Street, Des Moines, Iowa 50319.
Persons wishing to provide oral comments should contact Rosanne Mead no later
than April 24, 2000, to be placed on the agenda.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 514K.1(2).
The following amendment is proposed.
Amend 191—Chapter 35 by adopting the following
new rules:
CONSUMER GUIDE
191—35.35(514K) Purpose. These rules implement
Iowa Code Supplement section 514K.1(2) which requires the commissioner and the
director of public health to annually publish a consumer guide. These rules
apply to all carriers providing health insurance coverage in the individual,
small employer group and large group markets that utilize a preferred provider
arrangement and to all health maintenance organizations.
191—35.36(514K) Information filing
requirements.
35.36(1) Each health maintenance organization and
insurer using a preferred provider arrangement shall annually file with the
division no later than March 1 the following information by plan as requested by
the division:
a. Health plan employer data information set
(HEDIS).
b. Network composition.
c. Other information determined to be beneficial to consumers
including but not limited to consumer survey information.
35.36(2) Each health maintenance organization and
insurer using a preferred provider arrangement shall transmit the
above–requested information by electronic mail or disk–ette in a
format prescribed by the division.
191—35.37(514K) Limitation of information
published. The division may establish limits on the data to be collected
and published in the event the division believes the information is not
statistically relevant and would not be beneficial to consumers.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 514K.1.
ARC 9772A
LOTTERY DIVISION[705]
Notice of Termination
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections
17A.3(1)“b” and 99E.9(3), the Lottery Division terminates the rule
making initiated by its Notice of Intended Action published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 9, 2000, as ARC 9650A amending
Chapter 1, “General Operation of the Lottery,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
The Notice proposed to adopt new rule 705—1.30(99E)
providing a uniform process for the granting of waivers or variances from rules
adopted by the Lottery Division in compliance with Executive Order Number
11.
The Lottery Division is terminating the rule making commenced
in ARC 9650A and will renotice the proposed amendments to incorporate
further changes and clarifications to requirements under Executive Order Number
11.
ARC 9769A
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 15, “General License Regulations,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
This amendment combines two rules dealing with volunteer
safety/education instructor certification for bow and fur harvester, snowmobile
and all–terrain vehicle, boating safety and hunter education. This will
serve to simplify and provide more uniformity to the overall instructor
certification process.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials
should be directed to the Law Enforcement Bureau, Department of Natural
Resources, Wallace State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034; fax
(515)281–6794. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should
contact the Law Enforcement Bureau at (515)281–4515 or at the Law
Enforcement Bureau offices on the fourth floor of the Wallace State Office
Building.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, at 2 p.m. in
the Fourth Floor West Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements such as hearing or mobility impairments should contact the
Department of Natural Resources and advise of specific needs.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section
483A.27.
The following amendment is proposed.
Rescind rules 571—15.9(483A) and
571—15.10(483A), adopt the following new rule and
renumber 571— 15.11(483A) and 571—15.12(483A) as
571—15.10(483A) and 571—15.11(483A):
571—15.9(483A) Volunteer bow and fur harvester
education instructors, snowmobile and all–terrain vehicle (ATV) safety
instructors, boating safety instructors and hunter education
instructors.
15.9(1) Purpose. Pursuant to Iowa Code sections
321G.23(2), 462A.1 and 483A.27(4), the department will certify volunteer
instructors to teach bow, fur harvester, snowmobile, ATV, boating and hunter
education courses.
15.9(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this
rule:
“Certified instructor” means a person who has met
all criteria in this rule for one or more of the above–named
courses.
“Course” means the department’s bow, fur
harvester, snowmobile, ATV, boating and hunter education and ethics
courses.
“Department” means the Department of Natural
Resources, Wallace State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0034.
“Instructor applicant” means a person who has
applied to become a certified volunteer instructor for one of the
above–named courses.
15.9(3) Minimum qualifications. The following
conditions must be satisfied before any person can become a certified
instructor. Failure to meet these conditions will result in the denial of the
application. An applicant may be disqualified if the applicant has accumulated
any habitual offender points pursuant to rule 571—15.6(481A), or other
license suspension by the court or department. The instructor applicant will be
notified of the denial by the recreational safety coordinator. An instructor
applicant shall:
a. Submit an application as provided by the department to the
local conservation officer or recreational safety officer.
b. Be at least 18 years of age.
c. Have experience in handling equipment, such as firearms,
bows and arrows, furbearer traps, snowmobiles, ATVs and various navigational
vessels, that is necessary for the various prescribed courses.
d. Have completed the course as defined in subrule
15.9(2).
e. Attend and pass an instructor’s training and
certification course administered by the department.
f. Submit to a background check. This check will include, but
not be limited to, a criminal history check as provided by the department of
public safety. A record of a felony conviction will disqualify the applicant.
A record of serious or aggravated misdemeanors may disqualify the applicant
based on type of offense and year committed.
g. Successfully complete the apprenticeship as required in
subrule 15.9(4).
15.9(4) Instructor applicant apprenticeship. In
addition to subrule 15.9(3), the following conditions must be satisfied to
complete the instructor applicant apprenticeship:
a. Participate in one course.
b. Apprentice with a certified instructor.
The recreational safety officer may make the determination as
to which certified instructor will be supervising the instructor applicant
during the apprenticeship.
15.9(5) Certified education instructor
responsibilities. A certified instructor has the following
responsibilities:
a. To complete all prerequisites to becoming an instructor as
provided in subrules 15.9(3) and 15.9(4).
b. To follow all policies and procedures as set forth in the
current “Instructor Procedures Manual.”
c. To assist in the recruitment and training of additional
volunteer instructors.
d. To recruit and train students in the applied–for
prescribed course program.
e. To actively promote the program in the instructor’s
county and to arrange for publicity for each new class.
f. To maintain order and discipline in the classroom and
outdoor classroom at all times.
g. To accurately fill out required forms and reports for each
class and mail that material to the recreational safety coordinator within 15
days after completion of the course.
h. To teach the course as prescribed by the
department.
i. To maintain a file on all students that the instructor
teaches.
j. To actively participate in one course every two years. If
this requirement is not met, the instructor’s certification may be
terminated after notification by letter by the recreational safety coordinator.
The person may reapply to become a volunteer safety education instructor
pursuant to subrule 15.9(3).
k. To attend a minimum of one continuing education instructor
workshop every three years for hunter education as provided by the
department.
15.9(6) Grounds for revocation of instructor
certification. The department may, at any time, seek to revoke the instructor
certification of any person who:
a. Fails to meet the instructor responsibilities as outlined
in subrules 15.9(4) and 15.9(5).
b. Fails to follow the policies and procedures as set forth in
the current “Instructor Procedures Manual.”
c. Falsifies any information as may be required by the
department.
d. Handles any equipment in an unsafe manner, or allows any
student or other instructor to handle equipment in a reckless or unsafe
manner.
e. Is convicted of or forfeits bond for any fish and game,
snowmobile, ATV or navigation violation of this state or any other
state.
f. Uses abusive or foul language while conducting a
course.
g. Participates in a course while under the influence of
alcohol or any illegal drug.
h. Has substantiated complaints filed against the instructor
by the public, department personnel or other certified instructor(s).
i. Fails to meet the requirements in subrule 15.9(5),
paragraphs “j” and “k.”
j. Is convicted of a felony or an aggravated or serious
misdemeanor as defined in the statutes of this state. This would also include
any felonies or comparable misdemeanors of any other state.
k. Receives compensation directly or indirectly from students
for time spent preparing for or participating in a course.
15.9(7) Termination of certification. Any certified
instructor has the right, at any time, to voluntarily terminate certification.
If an instructor voluntarily terminates certification or certification is
terminated by the department, the instructor must return to the department the
certification card and all materials that were provided.
15.9(8) Compensation for instructors. Instructor
applicants and certified instructors shall not receive any compensation for
their time either directly or indirectly from students while preparing for or
participating in a course. However, instructor applicants and certified
instructors may require students to pay for actual course–related expenses
involving facilities, meals or materials other than those provided by the
department.
15.9(9) Hearing rights. If the department seeks to
revoke an instructor certification pursuant to subrule 15.9(6), the department
shall provide written notice of intent to revoke the certification as provided
in 561—7.16(17A,455A). If the certified instructor requests a hearing, it
shall be conducted in accordance with 561—Chapter 7.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
321G.23(2), 462A.1 and 483A.27.
ARC 9768A
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 16, “Public, Commercial, Private Docks and Dock Management
Areas,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments extend the current “general dock
permit” expiration date from March 1, 1999, to March 1, 2005, for private
docks in compliance with rule 16.3(461A) and set the term length for general
permits at five years by definition. These amendments will not change the
current private dock standards or required specifications.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendments on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials
should be directed to the Law Enforcement Bureau, Department of Natural
Resources, Wallace State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034;
fax (515)281–6794. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should
contact the Law Enforcement Bureau at (515)281–4515 or at the Law
Enforcement Bureau offices on the fourth floor of the Wallace State Office
Building.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, at 1 p.m. in
the Fourth Floor West Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendments.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements such as hearing or mobility impairments should contact the
Department of Natural Resources and advise of specific needs.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
461A.4.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
571—16.1(461A), definition of “general permit,” as
follows:
“General permit” means a permit issued as a rule
of this chapter to authorize maintenance of an eligible class of private docks.
The owner of a private dock that is eligible for coverage under a general permit
need not file an individual dock permit application. Unless otherwise
specified, a general permit is valid for five years.
ITEM 2. Amend rule 571—16.3(461A),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
571—16.3(461A) General permit for certain private
docks on lakes. This rule constitutes a general permit forcertain private
docks on lakes as defined in 571— 16.1(461A). This general permit expires
March 1, 1999 2005. This general permit authorizes
maintenance of private docks conforming to the standard conditions set forth in
571—16.5(461A) and the following additional criteria:
ARC 9770A
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 34, “Community Forestry Challenge Grant Program,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
This amendment clarifies the rules for the community tree
planting grants program and expands sources of funding.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials
should be directed to the Forestry Division, Department of Natural Resources,
Wallace State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034; fax
(515)281–8894. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should
contact the Forestry Division at (515)281–8657 or at the Division offices
on the fourth floor of the Wallace State Office Building.
There will be a public hearing on April 25, 2000, at 2 p.m. in
the Fourth Floor East Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend a public hearing and have
special requirements such as hearing or mobility impairments should contact the
Department of Natural Resources and advise of specific needs.
This amendment is also Adopted and Filed Emergency and is
published herein as ARC 9771A. The content of that submission is
incorporated by reference.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
456A.20 and 461A.2.
ARC 9762A
NURSING BOARD[655]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 17A.3 and
147.76, the Board of Nursing hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 6, “Nursing Practice for Registered Nurses/Licensed Practical
Nurses,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments rescind a subrule prohibiting the initiation
of infusion pumps by the LPN and amend a subrule regarding the hanging of
hypertonic solutions by the LPN.
Any interested person may make written comments or suggestions
on or before April 25, 2000. Such written materials should be directed to the
Executive Director, Board of Nursing, RiverPoint Business Park, 400 S.W. 8th
Street, Suite B, Des Moines, Iowa 50309–4685. Persons who want to convey
their views orally should contact the Executive Director at (515)281–3256,
or in the Board office at 400 S.W. 8th Street, by appointment.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
152.1.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 6.5(4),
paragraph “b,” as follows:
b. Administration of blood and blood products; vasodilators,
vasopressors, oxytoxics, chemotherapy, colloid therapy, total parenteral
nutrition, hypertonic solutions, anticoagulants,
antiarrhythmics, and thrombolytics and solutions with a
total osmolarity of 600 or greater.
ITEM 2. Rescind subrule 6.5(4),
paragraph “c,” and reletter paragraphs “d”
and “e” as “c” and
“d.”
ARC 9757A
PHARMACY EXAMINERS
BOARD[657]
Notice of Termination
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 124.301,
147.76, and 272C.4, the Board of Pharmacy Examiners terminates the rule making
initiated by its Notice of Intended Action published in the Iowa Administrative
Bulletin on October 6, 1999, as ARC 9374A, proposing to amend Chapter 6,
“General Pharmacy Licenses,” Chapter 7, “Hospital Pharmacy
Licenses,” Chapter 8, “Minimum Standards for the Practice of
Pharmacy,” Chapter 15, “Correctional Facility Pharmacy
Licenses,” and Chapter 36, “Discipline,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
The Notice proposed that the pharmacist in charge of each Iowa
pharmacy, annually and at any time that a new license is issued, complete a
self–assessment of the pharmacy. The proposed amendments also included
required actions if an assessment disclosed deficiencies in the operations
orpractices of the pharmacy and provided for disciplinarysanctions for
noncompliance with the requirements of the self–assessment
rules.
The Board is terminating the rule making commenced in ARC
9374A based on comments received from and concerns expressed by pharmacists.
Based on the Board’s assessment, the amendments would have imposed
excessive burdens on pharmacists and defeated the primary purpose of the
self–assessment, which is education. The Board intends, after further
discussion and development of self–assessment forms, to submit Notice of
Intended Action on less burdensome rules.
PHARMACY EXAMINERS
BOARD[657]
Notice of Public Hearing
Executive Order Number 8 directs each state agency and board
with rule–making authority to comprehensively review its rules and submit
a report to the Governor’s Office no later than November 1, 2001. The
Board of Pharmacy Examiners’ plan for regulatory review provides for at
least one public hearing to seek public input and comment on the Board’s
rules.
Notice is hereby given that a public hearing will be held on
Wednesday, April 26, 2000, at 9 a.m. to hear oral comments on the chapters
listed below. The hearing will be held in a conference room at 400 S.W. Eighth
Street, Suite E, Des Moines, Iowa. To ensure that everyone is accorded an
opportunity to speak, the Board reserves the right to limit oral presentations
at the public hearing.
In addition, any interested person may present written
comments, data, views, and arguments no later than April 26, 2000, on any of the
rules in these chapters. Written materials may be delivered to the offices of
the Board of Pharmacy Examiners, 400 S.W. Eighth Street, Suite E, Des Moines,
Iowa 50309–4688, be submitted via Internet E–mail
toIowaBPE@excite.com, or be transmitted by fax to (515)
281–4609.
Comments will be heard on rules in the following chapters of
657 Iowa Administrative Code: Chapter 10, “Controlled Substances”;
Chapter 11, “Drugs in Emergency Medical Service Programs”; Chapter
12, “Precursor Substances”; and Chapter 18, “Anabolic
Steroids.”
ARC 9767A
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE
DIVISION[645]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147.76, the
Board of Optometry Examiners hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 180, “Board of Optometry Examiners,” and adopt new Chapter
181, “Continuing Education,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The proposed amendments rescind the current endorsement rule
and adopt in lieu thereof a new rule which clarifies licensure by endorsement;
rescind the current continuing education rules; adopt a new chapter for
continuing education; renumber the rule regarding grounds for discipline; and
amend cross references to rules that are no longer in use.
Any interested person may make written comments on the
proposed amendments no later than April 26, 2000, addressed to Rosalie Steele,
Professional Licensure Division, Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office
Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
The Division sent letters to the public for comment and six
letters were received in return. Division staff also had input on these rules.
The comments received were discussed by the Board and decisions were made based
on need, clarity, intent and statutory authority, cost and fairness.
A public hearing will be held on April 26, 2000, from9 to 11
a.m. in the Fifth Floor Board Conference Room, Lucas State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the proposed
amendments.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147.76 and chapter 272C.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Rescind rule
645—180.6(154) and adopt in lieu thereof the following
new rule:
645—180.6(154) Licensure by endorsement. An
applicant who has been a licensed optometrist under laws of another jurisdiction
for one year or more shall file an application for licensure by endorsement with
the board office. The following requirements must be satisfied prior to
licensure to practice optometry in Iowa through the procedure of licensure by
endorsement.
180.6(1) Application for licensure by endorsement to
practice optometry in this state shall be made to the board of optometry
examiners on a form provided by the board which must be complete.
180.6(2) Applications must be filed with the
board along with the following:
a. Proof of graduation with a doctor of optometry degree from
an accredited school and, in the case of foreign graduates, adherence to the
current requirements of the National Board of Examiners in Optometry to sit for
the examination.
b. Evidence of successful completion of the examination of the
National Board of Examiners in Optometry that was current at the time of initial
licensure, or the examination that is currently offered by the National Board of
Examiners in Optometry.
c. An applicant licensed to practice optometry in any state
prior to January 1, 1986, shall supply evidence of completion of a course
provided by an institution accredited by a regional or professional
accreditation organization which is recognized or approved by the council on
postsecondary accreditation of the United States Department of Education, which
has particular emphasis on the examination, diagnosis and treatment of
conditions of the human eye and adnexa. The course shall include a minimum of
40 hours of didactic education and 60 hours of approved supervised clinical
training in the examination, diagnosis, and treatment of conditions of the human
eye and adnexa. An applicant shall have completed an additional 44 hours of
education with emphasis on treatment and management of glaucoma and use of oral
pharmaceutical agents for treatment and management of ocular diseases.
d. Proof of licensure and evidence of one year of active
practice in another state, territory or district of the United States
immediately preceding the date of application that has a similar scope of
practice as determined by the board. When the scope of practice is different,
the applicant shall make available to the board evidence of completion of
additional hours of training related to the area of the deficiency as prescribed
by the board. The board may waive the requirement of one year of active
practice if during the above mentioned one–year period, the applicant
was:
(1) Teaching optometry;
(2) A military optometrist;
(3) A supervisory or administrative optometrist; or
(4) A researcher in optometry.
e. Verification by an official statement from each state board
of examiners regarding the status of the applicant’s license, including
date of licensure, expiration date and available information regarding any
pending or prior investigation that has resulted in disciplinary action. The
applicant shall request such statements from all states in which the applicant
is currently or was formerly licensed.
f. Statement as to any claims, complaints, judgments or
settlements, pending or final, made with respect to the applicant arising out of
the alleged negligence or malpractice in rendering professional services as an
optometrist.
ITEM 2. Rescind and reserve rules
645—180.12(154) to 645—180.18(154,272C).
ITEM 3. Renumber rule
645—180.115(272C) as 645— 180.11(272C).
ITEM 4. Amend renumbered rule
645—180.11(272C), introductory paragraph, as follows:
645—180.11(272C) Grounds for discipline. The
board may impose any of the disciplinary sanctions set forth in rule
180.113(272C) the rules, including civil penalties in an amount
not to exceed $1,000 or maximum allowed, when the board determines that the
licensee is guilty of any of the following acts or offenses:
ITEM 5. Amend renumbered subrule
180.11(19) as follows:
180.11(19) Failure to file the reports required by
rule 645—180.101 9.3(272C) concerning acts
or omissions committed by another licensee.
ITEM 6. Adopt new
645—Chapter 181 as follows:
CHAPTER 181
CONTINUING EDUCATION
645—181.1(154) Definitions. For the purpose of
these rules, the following definitions shall apply:
“Active license” means the license of a person who
is acting, practicing, functioning, and working in compliance with license
requirements.
“Administrator” means the administrator of the
board of optometry examiners.
“Approved program/activity” means a continuing
education program/activity meeting the standards set forth in these rules, which
has received advance approval by the board pursuant to these rules.
“Approved sponsor” means a person or an
organization sponsoring continuing education activities that has been approved
by the board as a sponsor pursuant to these rules. During the time an
organization, educational institution, or person is an approved sponsor, all
continuing education activities of such organization, educational institution,
or person may be deemed automatically approved.
“Audit” means the selection of licensees
for verification of satisfactory completion of continuing education requirements
during a specified time period or the selection of providers for verification of
adherence to continuing provider requirements during a specified time
period.
“Board” means the board of optometry
examiners.
“Continuing education” means planned, organized
learning acts designed to maintain, improve, or expand a licensee’s
knowledge and skills in order for the licensee to develop new knowledge and
skills relevant to the enhancement of practice, education, or theory development
to improve the safety and welfare of the public.
“Hour of continuing education” means a clock hour
spent by a licensee in actual attendance at and completion of approved
continuing education activity.
“Inactive license” means the license of a person
who is not engaged in practice in the state of Iowa.
“Lapsed license” means a license that a person has
failed to renew as required, or the license of a person who has failed to meet
stated obligations for renewal within a stated time.
“License” means license to practice.
“Licensee” means any person licensed to
practice as an optometrist in the state of Iowa.
645—181.2(154) Continuing education
requirements.
181.2(1) The biennial continuing education compliance
period shall extend for a two–year period between July 1 and June 30 of
each even–numbered year.
a. Requirements for nontherapeutic licensees. Each biennium,
each person who is licensed to practice as an optometrist in this state and who
is not therapeutically certified shall be required to complete a minimum of 30
hours of continuing education approved by the board. Nontherapeutic licensees
must comply with Iowa continuing education rules for license renewal and
reinstatement by meeting the continuing education requirements in the state of
practice.
b. Requirements for therapeutic licensees. Each biennium,
each person who is licensed to practice as a therapeutic licensee in this state
shall be required to complete a minimum of 50 hours of continuing education
approved by the board. A minimum of 20 hours of continuing education per
biennium shall be in the treatment and management of ocular disease.
Therapeutic licensees must comply with Iowa continuing education rules for
license renewal and reinstatement regardless of the licensee’s place of
residence or place of practice.
181.2(2) Requirements of new licensees. Those persons
licensed for the first time shall not be required to complete continuing
education as a prerequisite for the first renewal of their licenses. Continuing
education hours acquired anytime from the initial licensing until the second
license renewal may be used. The new licensee will be required to complete a
minimum of 50 hours of continuing education per biennium for each subsequent
license renewal.
181.2(3) Hours of continuing education credit may be
obtained by attending and participating in a continuing education activity.
These hours must be approved by the board or otherwise meet the requirements
herein and be approved by the board pursuant to statutory provisions and the
rules that complement them.
181.2(4) No hours of continuing education shall be
carried over into the next biennium.
181.2(5) It is the responsibility of each licensee to
finance the cost of continuing education.
645—181.3(154) Standards for approval.
181.3(1) General criteria. A continuing education
activity which meets all of the following criteria is appropriate for continuing
education credit if it is determined by the board that the continuing education
activity:
a. Constitutes an organized program of learning which
contributes directly to the professional competency of the licensee;
b. Pertains to common subject matters which integrally relate
to the practice of the profession;
c. Is conducted by individuals who have specialized education,
training and experience by reason of which said individuals should be considered
experts concerning the subject matter of the program. The application must be
accompanied by a paper, manual or outline which substantively pertains to the
subject matter of the program and reflects program schedule, goals and
objectives. The board may request the qualifications of presenters.
d. Fulfills stated program goals, objectives, or both;
and
e. Provides proof of attendance to licensees in attendance
including:
(1) Date, location, course title, presenter(s);
(2) Numbers of program contact hours. (One contact hour
usually equals one hour of continuing education credit.); and
(3) Official signature or verification by program
sponsor.
181.3(2) Specific criteria.
a. Continuing education hours of credit may be obtained by
attending:
(1) The continuing education programs of the Iowa Optometric
Association, the American Optometric Association, the American Academy of
Optometry, and national regional optometric congresses, schools of optometry and
all state optometric associations. The department of ophthalmology of the
school of medicine of the University of Iowa shall be one of the approved
providers of continuing education for Iowa optometrists;
(2) Postgraduate study through an accredited school or college
of optometry;
(3) Meetings or seminars that are approved and certified for
optometric continuing education by the Association of Regulatory Boards of
Optometry’s Council on Optometric Practitioner Education Committee (COPE);
or
(4) Continuing education activities of an approved
sponsor.
b. The maximum number of hours in each category in each
biennium is as follows:
(1) Twelve hours of credit for local study group programs that
have prior approval or an approved sponsorship.
(2) Ten hours of credit for correspondence courses, which
include written and electronically transmitted material and have a
post–course test. Certification of the continuing education requirements
and of passing the test must be given by the institution providing the
continuing education, and that institution must be accredited by a regional or
professional accreditation organization which is recognized or approved by the
Council on Postsecondary Accreditation of the United States Department of
Education.
(3) Six hours of credit may be used for practice management
courses.
(4) Two hours of credit may be used for dependent adult abuse
and child abuse identification.
(5) Four hours of credit for current certification in CPR, by
the American Heart Association, the American Red Cross or an equivalent
organization, may be used.
(6) Twenty hours of credit may be used for postgraduate study
courses.
(7) Twenty hours of credit in the treatment and management of
ocular disease from the University of Iowa may be used.
645—181.4(154) Approval of sponsors, programs, and
activities for continuing education.
181.4(1) Approval of sponsors. An applicant
who desires approval as a sponsor of courses, programs, or other continuing
education activities shall, unless exempted elsewhere in these rules, apply for
approval to the board on the form designated by the board stating the
applicant’s educational history for the preceding two years or proposed
plan for the next two years.
a. The form shall include the following:
(1) Date, place, course title(s) offered and outline of
content;
(2) Total hours of instruction presented;
(3) Names and qualifications of instructors,
includingrésumé or vitae; and
(4) Evaluation form(s).
b. Records shall be retained by the sponsor for four
years.
c. Attendance record report. The person or organization
sponsoring an approved continuing education activity shall provide a certificate
of attendance or verification to the licensee providing the following
information:
(1) Program date(s);
(2) Course title and presenter;
(3) Location;
(4) Number of clock hours attended and continuing education
hours earned;
(5) Name of sponsor and sponsor number;
(6) Licensee’s name; and
(7) Method of presentation.
d. All approved sponsors shall maintain a copy of the
following:
(1) The continuing education activity;
(2) List of enrolled licensees’ names and license
numbers; and
(3) Number of continuing education clock hours awarded for a
minimum of four years from the date of the continuing education
activity.
The sponsor shall submit a report of all continuing education
programs conducted in the previous year during the assigned month for reporting
designated by the board. The report shall also include a summary of the
evaluations completed by the licensees.
181.4(2) Prior approval of programs/activities.
An organization or person other than an approved sponsor that desires prior
approval of a course, program or other educational activity or that desires to
establish accreditation of such activity prior to attendance shall apply for
approval to the board on a form provided by the board at least 60 days in
advance of the commencement of the activity. The board shall approve or deny
such application in writing within 30 days of receipt of such application. The
application shall state:
a. The date(s);
b. Course(s) offered;
c. Course outline;
d. Total hours of instruction; and
e. Names and qualifications of speakers and other pertinent
information.
The organization or person shall be notified of approval or
denial by ordinary mail.
181.4(3) Review of programs. Continuing
educationprograms/activities shall be reported every year at the designated time
as assigned by the board. The board may at any time reevaluate an approved
sponsor. If, after reevaluation, the board finds there is cause for revocation
of the approval of an approved sponsor, the board shall give notice of
therevocation to that sponsor by certified mail. The sponsor shall have the
right to hearing regarding the revocation. The request for hearing must be sent
within 20 days after the receipt of the notice of revocation. The hearing shall
be held within 90 days after the receipt of the request for hearing. The board
shall give notice by certified mail to the sponsor of the date set for the
hearing at least 30 days prior to the hearing. The board shall conduct the
hearing in compliance with rule 645—11.9(17A).
181.4(4) Post–approval of activities. A
licensee seeking credit for attendance and participation in an educational
activity which was not conducted by an approved sponsor or otherwise approved
shall submit to the board, within 30 days after completion of such activity, the
following:
a. The date(s);
b. Course(s) offered;
c. Course outline;
d. Total hours of instruction and credit hours
requested;
e. Names and qualifications of speakers and other pertinent
information;
f. Request for credit which includes a brief summary of the
activity; and
g. Certificate of attendance or verification.
Within 90 days after receipt of such application, the board
shall advise the licensee in writing by ordinary mail whether the activity is
approved and the number of hours allowed. A licensee not complying with the
requirements of this subrule may be denied credit for such activity.
181.4(5) Voluntary relinquishment. The
approved sponsor may voluntarily relinquish sponsorship by notifying the board
office in writing.
645—181.5(154) Reporting continuing education by
licensee. At the time of license renewal, each licensee shall be required
to submit a report on continuing education to the board on a
board–approved form.
181.5(1) The information on the form shall
include:
a. Title of continuing education activity;
b. Date(s);
c. Sponsor of the activity;
d. Board–approved sponsor number; and
e. Number of continuing education hours earned.
181.5(2) Audit of continuing education report. After
each educational biennium, the board will audit a percentage of the continuing
education reports before granting the renewal of licenses to those being
audited.
a. The board will select licensees to be audited.
b. The licensee shall make available to the board for auditing
purposes a copy of the certificate of attendance or verification for all
reported activities that includes the following information:
(1) Date, location, course title, schedule (brochure,
pamphlet, program, presenter(s)), and method of presentation;
(2) Number of contact hours for program attended;
and
(3) Certificate of attendance or verification indicating
successful completion of course.
c. For auditing purposes, the licensee must retain the above
information for two years after the biennium has end–ed.
d. Submission of a false report of continuing education or
failure to meet continuing education requirements may cause the license to lapse
and may result in formal disciplinary action.
e. All renewal license applications that are submitted late
(after the end of the compliance period) may be subject to audit of continuing
education report.
f. Failure to receive the renewal application shall not
relieve the licensee of responsibility of meeting continuing education
requirements and submitting the renewal fee by the end of the compliance
period.
645—181.6(154) Reinstatement of lapsed license.
Failure of the licensee to renew within 30 days after expiration date shall
cause the license to lapse. A person who allows a license to lapse cannot
engage in practice in Iowa without first complying with all regulations
governing reinstatement as outlined in the board rules. A person who allows the
license to lapse may apply to the board for reinstatement of the license.
Reinstatement of the lapsed license may be granted by the board if the
applicant:
1. Submits a written application for reinstatement to the
board;
2. Pays all of the renewal fees then due;
3. Pays all penalty fees which have been assessed by the board
for failure to renew;
4. Pays reinstatement fee; and
5. Provides evidence of satisfactory completion of Iowa
continuing education requirements during the period since the license lapsed.
The total number of continuing education hours required for license
reinstatement is computed by multiplying 50 for therapeutic licensees (with a
maximum of 100) and 30 for nontherapeutic licensees (with a maximum of 60) by
the number of bienniums since the license lapsed. If the license has lapsed for
more than five years, the applicant shall successfully pass the Iowa state
optometry jurisprudence examination with a minimum grade of 75
percent.
645—181.7(154,272C) Continuing education waiver for
active practitioners. An optometrist licensed to practice optometry shall
be deemed to have complied with the continuing education requirements of this
state during the period that the licensee serves honorably on active duty in the
military services or as a government employee outside the United States as a
practicing optometrist.
645—181.8(154,272C) Continuing education waiver for
inactive practitioners. A licensee who is not engaged in practice in the
state of Iowa and who is residing within or without the state of Iowa may be
granted a waiver of continuing education compliance and obtain a certificate of
waiver upon written application to the board. The application shall contain a
statement that the applicant will not engage in practice in Iowa without first
complying with all regulations governing reinstatement after waiver. The
application for a certificate of waiver shall be submitted upon forms provided
by the board.
645—181.9(154,272C) Continuing education waiver for
physical disability or illness. The board may, in individual cases
involving physical disability or illness, grant waivers of the minimum education
requirements or extension of time within which to fulfill the same or make the
required reports. No waiver or extension of time shall be granted unless
written application therefor shall be made on forms provided by the board and
signed by the licensee and appropriate licensed health care practitioners. The
board may grant waiver of the minimum educational requirements for any period of
time not to exceed one calendar year from the onset of disability or illness.
In the event that the physical disability or illness upon which a waiver has
been granted continues beyond the period of waiver, the licensee must reapply
for an extension of the waiver. The board may, as a condition of any waiver
granted, require the applicant to make up a certain portion or all of the
minimum educational requirements waived by such methods as may be prescribed by
the board.
645—181.10(154,272C) Reinstatement of inactive
practitioners. Inactive practitioners who have been granted a waiver of
compliance with these rules and obtained a certificate of exemption shall, prior
to engaging in the practice of optometry in the state of Iowa, satisfy the
following requirements for reinstatement.
181.10(1) Submit written application for
reinstatement to the board upon forms provided by the board with appropriate
reinstatement fee; and
181.10(2) Furnish in the application evidence of one
of the following:
a. Full–time practice in another state of the United
States or the District of Columbia and completion of continuing education for
each biennium of inactive status substantially equivalent in the opinion of the
board to that required under these rules; or
b. Completion of a total number of hours of approved
continuing education computed by multiplying 50 for therapeutic licensees or 30
for nontherapeutic licensees by the number of bienniums a certificate of
exemption shall be in effect for such applicant; or
c. Successful completion of any or all parts of the national
license examination as deemed necessary by the board, successfully completed
within one year immediately prior to the submission of such application for
reinstatement.
645—181.11(272C) Hearings. In the event of
denial, in whole or part, of any application for approval of a continuing
education program or credit for continuing education activity, the applicant,
licensee or program provider shall have the right within 20 days after the
sending of the notification of denial by ordinary mail to request a hearing
which shall be held within 90 days after receipt of the request for hearing.
The hearing shall be conducted by the board or an administrative law judge
designated by the board, in substantial compliance with the hearing procedure
set forth in rule 645—11.9(17A).
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 272C.2
and chapter 154.
ARC 9758A
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147A.4, the
Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 130, “Emergency Medical Services Training Grants,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
The proposed amendments will update definitions to be
consistent with other chapters regarding emergency medical services and also
allow the use of training grant money to be spent for certification,
recertification, and written examination fees.
The Department has not provided specific provisions for a
waiver or variance from rules in Chapter 130. A party seeking a waiver or
variance from rules in Chapter 130 should do so pursuant to the
Department’s variance and waiver provisions contained in 641—Chapter
178.
The Department of Public Health will hold a public hearing
over the Iowa Communications Network (ICN) on Tuesday, April 25, 2000, from 1 to
2 p.m. Sites participating in the ICN broadcast include the
following:
• National Guard Armory, 11
East 23rd Street, Spencer
• National Guard Armory,
1712 LaClark Road, Carroll
• National Guard Armory,
1160 10th Street SW, Mason City
• Department of Public
Health, ICN Room, Sixth Floor, Lucas State Office Building, 321 East 12th
Street, Des Moines
• National Guard Armory, 195
Radford Road, Dubuque
• National Guard Armory, 501
Highway 1 South, Washington
At the hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and
addresses for the record and to confine their remarks to the subject of the
amendments. Any person who plans to attend the public hearing and who may have
special requirements, such as hearing or mobility impairments, should contact
the Department of Public Health and advise of specific needs.
Any oral or written comments must be received on or before
April 25, 2000. Comments should be addressed to Gary Ireland, EMS Bureau Chief,
Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0075.
These rules are intended to implement 1999 Iowa Acts, chapter
201, and Iowa Code chapter 135.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
641—130.1(135) as follows:
Amend the following definitions:
“Ambulance service” means any privately or
publicly owned service program which utilizes ambulances in order to provide
patient transportation and emergency medical care.
at the scene of an emergency or while en route to a hospital or
during transfer from one medical care facility to another or to a private
home.
“CEHs CEH” means
continuing education hours hour which
are is based upon a minimum of 50 minutes of training
per hour.
“Continuing education” means
approved training approved by the department which is
received after becoming obtained by a certified
as an EMS emergency medical care provider to
maintain, improve, or expand relevant skills and knowledge and to
satisfy renewal of certification requirements. This includes emergency
medical training for members of the general public.
“Emergency medical care personnel” or
“provider” means any individual currently certified by
the department pursuant to Iowa Code section 147A.6 an individual
whohas been trained to provide emergency and non–emergency medical care at
the first responder, EMT–basic, EMT–intermediate,
EMT–paramedic level or other certification levels adopted by rule by the
department, and who has been issued a certificate by the
department.
“Nontransport service” means any privately or
publicly owned rescue or first response EMS service
program which that does not provide patient
transportation (except when no ambulance is available or in a disaster
situation). and utilizes only first response vehicles to provide
emergency medical care at the scene of an emergency.
“Service program” or “service”
means any emergency medical care ambulance or nontransport service that has
received authorization by the department.
Rescind the following definition:
“EMS provider” means emergency medical
care personnel, other health care practitioners or members of the general public
involved in the provision of emergency medical care.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 130.4(2) as
follows:
130.4(2) Eligible costs. Costs which are eligible for
EMS training fund expenditures include:
a. Reimbursement of tuition, fees and materials following
successful completion of an EMS course. Practical and written
examination fees may also be included.
b. and c. No change.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 130.4(3) as
follows:
130.4(3) Ineligible costs. Costs which are not
eligible for funding include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. No change.
b. Certification/recertification
fees;
c. to m. No change.
n. Written examination fees.
ITEM 4. Amend 641—Chapter
130 by amending the implementation clause as follows:
These rules are intended to implement 1995 Iowa Acts,
House File 530 1999 Iowa Acts, chapter 201, and Iowa Code
chapter 135 as amended by 1995 Iowa Acts, Senate File
178.
ARC 9761A
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Notice of Intended Action
Notice is also given to the public that the
Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written
request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section
17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons
may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation hereby gives Notice of Intended Action
to amend Chapter 410, “Special Mobile Equipment,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
1999 Iowa Acts, chapter 13, section 28, repealed Iowa Code
section 321.21, which provided for the issuance of special mobile equipment
plates and certificates. The proposed amendments remove references to the
application process and issuance of special mobile equipment plates and
certificates. However, a certificate of title and registration may be obtained
in accordance with Iowa Code chapter 321 for a motor truck, trailer or
semitrailer which has special mobile equipment permanently attached.
Information was added concerning which office answers questions regarding
special mobile equipment.
No waiver provisions were included in these amendments. These
amendments are an interpretation of statute, and waivers are not appropriate to
the subject matter.
Any person or agency may submit written comments concerning
these proposed amendments or may submit a written request to make an oral
presentation. The comments or request shall:
1. Include the name, address, and telephone number of the
person or agency authoring the comments or request.
2. Reference the number and title of the proposed rule, as
given in this Notice, that is the subject of the comments or request.
3. Indicate the general content of a requested oral
presentation.
4. Be addressed to the Department of Transportation,
Director’s Staff Division, 800 Lincoln Way, Ames, Iowa 50010; fax
(515)239–1639; Internet E–mail address:
tgeorge@max.state.ia.us.
5. Be received by the Director’s Staff Division no later
than April 25, 2000.
A meeting to hear requested oral presentations is scheduled
for Thursday, April 27, 2000, at 8 a.m. in the conference room of the Motor
Vehicle Division, which is located on the upper level of Park Fair Mall, 100
Euclid Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa.
The meeting will be canceled without further notice if no oral
presentation is requested.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
321.18 and 321.20 and Iowa Code Supplement section 321E.12.
Proposed rule–making actions:
ITEM 1. Amend rule 761—410.1(321)
as follows:
761—410.1(321) General.
410.1(1) Special mobile equipment is defined in Iowa
Code section 321.1.
410.1(2) Special mobile equipment is exempt from the
ti–tling and registration provisions of Iowa Code sections 321.18 and
321.20. However, a certificate of title and registration may be obtained
in accordance with 761—Chapter 400 Iowa Code chapter
321 for a motor truck, trailer or semitrailer with special mobile
equipment that is permanently attached to a
motor truck, trailer or semitrailer. To obtain a certificate
of title, the owner must pay the title fee, but need not obtain a special mobile
equipment plate and certificate of identification.
410.1(3) Questions regarding special mobile
equipment may be directed by mail to the Office of Motor Carrier Services, Iowa
Department of Transportation, P.O. Box 10382, Des Moines, Iowa 50306–0382;
in person at its location in Park Fair Mall, 100 Euclid Avenue, Des Moines; or
by telephone at (515)237–3264.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 321.1,
321.18 and 321.21 321.20.
ITEM 2. Rescind rules
761—410.2(321) and 761— 410.3(321E).
ITEM 3. Adopt the following
new rule:
761—410.2(321E) Special mobile equipment transported
on a registered vehicle. The movement of special mobile equipment or
component parts of special mobile equipment transported on a vehicle registered
for the gross weight of the vehicle without load, as provided in Iowa Code
Supplement section 321E.12, is subject to the following:
410.2(1) A vehicle registered for its gross weight
without load shall not be used to transport special mobile equipment for
hire.
410.2(2) If the special mobile equipment is leased,
the lease agreement or a certified copy of the lease agreement shall be carried
in the cab of the transporting vehicle.
410.2(3) All movements of special mobile equipment
shall comply with the size and weight limits in Iowa Code chapter 321 unless a
permit to exceed these limits is obtained in accordance with Iowa Code chapter
321E.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 321E.12.
ARC 9764A
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Notice of Intended Action
Notice is also given to the public that the
Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written
request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section
17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons
may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation hereby gives Notice of Intended Action
to amend Chapter 529, “For–Hire Interstate Motor Carrier
Authority,” Iowa Administrative Code.
No changes to the federal regulations have occurred. However,
the Code of Federal Regulations was updated in October 1999, and the Department
needs to cite the most current version in these rules.
Any person or agency may submit written comments concerning
this proposed amendment or may submit a written request to make an oral
presentation. The comments or request shall:
1. Include the name, address, and telephone number of the
person or agency authoring the comments or request.
2. Reference the number and title of the proposed rule, as
given in this Notice, that is the subject of the comments or request.
3. Indicate the general content of a requested oral
presentation.
4. Be addressed to the Department of
Transportation,Director’s Staff Division, 800 Lincoln Way, Ames, Iowa
50010; fax (515)239–1639; Internet E–mail address:
tgeorge@max.state.ia.us.
5. Be received by the Director’s Staff Division no later
than April 25, 2000.
A meeting to hear requested oral presentations is scheduled
for Thursday, April 27, 2000, at 10 a.m. in the conference room of the Motor
Vehicle Division, which is located on the upper level of Park Fair Mall, 100
Euclid Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa.
The meeting will be canceled without further notice if no oral
presentation is requested.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
327B.
Proposed rule–making action:
Amend rule 761—529.1(327B) as follows:
761—529.1(327B) Motor carrier regulations. The
Iowa department of transportation adopts the Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR
Parts 365–379, dated October 1, 1998 1999, for
regulating interstate for–hire carriers.
Copies of this publication are available from the state law
library.
NOTICE—USURY
In accordance with the provisions of Iowa Code section 535.2,
subsection 3, paragraph “a,” the Superintendent of Banking has
determined that the maximum lawful rate of interest shall be:
March 1, 1999 — March 31, 1999 6.75%
April 1, 1999 — April 30, 1999 7.00%
May 1, 1999 — May 31, 1999 7.25%
June 1, 1999 — June 30, 1999 7.25%
July 1, 1999 — July 31, 1999 7.50%
August 1, 1999 — August 31, 1999 8.00%
September 1, 1999 — September 30, 1999 8.00%
October 1, 1999 — October 31, 1999 8.00%
November 1, 1999 — November 30, 1999 8.00%
December 1, 1999 — December 31, 1999 8.00%
January 1, 2000 — January 31, 2000 8.00%
February 1, 2000 — February 29, 2000 8.25%
March 1, 2000 — March 31, 2000 8.75%
April 1, 2000 — April 30, 2000 8.50%
ARC 9760A
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION
DIVISION[876]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 86.8, the
Workers’ Compensation Commissioner hereby gives Notice of Intended Action
to amend Chapter 1, “Purpose and Function”; Chapter 2,
“General Provisions”; Chapter 4, “Contested Cases”;
Chapter 5, “Declaratory Orders”; Chapter 8, “Substantive and
Interpretive Rules”; Chapter 9, “PublicRecords and Fair Information
Practices”; and Chapter 12, “Formal Review and Waiver of
Rules,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Item 1 amends the implementation clause to correct an Iowa
Code reference to section 84A.2 which has been transferred to 84A.5 by the Iowa
Code Editor.
Item 2 amends rule 2.4(85) to allow for lay testimony and
other evidence in addition to medical opinions based on the AMA guides in
determining an injured worker’s disability. This change makes the rule
consistent with supreme court decisions, including Miller v. Lauridsen Foods,
Inc., 525 N.W.2d 417 (Iowa 1994) and Terwilliger v. Snap–on Tools Corp.,
529 N.W.2d 267 (Iowa 1995).
Item 3 changes a reference to Iowa Rule of Civil Procedure
105, which was moved to rule 116, effective January 24, 1998.
Item 4 corrects a reference to a declaratory order and a
reference to the form number for a patient’s waiver.
Item 5 amends rule 4.17(85,86,17A) regarding exchange of
records to specify that all records received pursuant to a patient’s
waiver as well as medical records will be promptly served on opposing
parties.
Item 6 changes references to 1998 Iowa Acts to Iowa Code
section 17A.17.
Item 7 adds the agency fax number to the agency rule that
currently allows for filing by fax.
Item 8 changes a reference to 1998 Iowa Acts to Iowa Code
subsection 17A.9(5).
Item 9 changes a reference to 1998 Iowa Acts to Iowa Code
subsection 17A.9(1) and corrects a reference to a declaratory order.
Item 10 changes a reference to 1998 Iowa Acts to Iowa Code
section 17A.9.
Item 11 removes the requirement that the commissioner review
the fee structure for the allowable costs for duplication of medical records on
a specific date each year.
Item 12 changes a reference to 1998 Iowa Acts to Iowa Code
section 85B.9A.
Items 13, 14 and 15 specify that declaratory rulings and
declaratory orders are open records.
Item 16 amends the implementation clause by adding Iowa Code
section 17A.4(1)“b.”
The Division of Workers’ Compensation has determined
that these proposed amendments will not necessitate additional annual
expenditures exceeding $100,000 by political subdivisions or agencies which
contract with political subdivisions. Therefore, no fiscal note accompanies
this Notice.
The Division of Workers’ Compensation has determined
that these amendments will not have an impact on small business within the
meaning of Iowa Code section 17A.4A.
None of the proposed amendments includes a waiver provision
because rule 876—12.4(17A) provides the specified situations for waiver of
Workers’ Compensation Division rules.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on these proposed amendments on or before April 25, 2000, to the Workers’
Compensation Commissioner, Division of Workers’ Compensation, 1000 East
Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
17A.3(1)“a” and “b,” 17A.4(1)“b,” 17A.9,
17A.12, 17A.17, 22.7, 84A.5, 85.27, 85B.9A, 86.8, 86.13, 86.18, and
86.24.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend 876—Chapter 1
by amending the implementation clause as follows:
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
17A.3(1)“a” and “b” and 84A.2
84A.5.
ITEM 2. Amend rule 876—2.4(85) as
follows:
876—2.4(85) Guides to evaluation of permanent
impairment. The Guides to the Evaluation of Permanent Impairment published
by the American Medical Association are adopted as a guide for determining
permanent partial disabilities under Iowa Code section 85.34(2)“a”
to “s.” The extent of loss or percentage of permanent impairment
may be determined by use of this guide and payment of weekly compensation for
permanent partial scheduled injuries made accordingly. Payment so made shall be
recognized by the workers’ compensation commissioner as a prima facie
showing of compliance by the employer or insurance carrier with the foregoing
sections of the Iowa Workers’ Compensation Act. Nothing in this rule
shall be construed to prevent the presentations of other medical opinions or
guides or other material evidence for the purpose of establishing that
the degree of permanent impairment disability to which
the claimant would be entitled would be more or less than the entitlement
indicated in the AMA guide.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
85.34(2).
ITEM 3. Amend rule 876—4.2(86),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
876—4.2(86) Separate evidentiary hearing or
consolidation of proceedings. In addition to applying the provision of Iowa
rule of civil procedure 105 116, a person presiding over
a contested case proceeding in a workers’ compensation matter may conduct
a separate evidentiary hearing for determination of any issue in the contested
case proceeding which goes to the whole or any material part of the case. An
order determining the issue presented shall be issued before a hearing is held
on the remaining issues. The issue determined in the separate evidentiary
hearing shall be precluded at the hearing of the remaining issues. If the order
on the separate issue does not dispose of the whole case, it shall be deemed
interlocutory for purposes of appeal.
ITEM 4. Amend rule
876—4.6(85,86,17A), first and second unnumbered paragraphs, as
follows:
The original notice Form 100, Form 100A, Form 100B, Form 100C,
or a determination of liability reimbursement for benefits paid and recovery of
interest form shall provide for the data required in Iowa Code section 17A.12(2)
and shall contain factors relevant to the contested case proceedings listed in
4.1(85,85A,85B,86,87,17A). The Form 100 is to be used for all contested case
proceedings except as indicated in this rule. The Form 100A is to be used for
the contested case proceedings provided for in subrules 4.1(11) and 4.1(12).
The Form 100B is to be used for the contested case proceeding provided for in
subrule 4.1(8). The Form 100C is to be used for the contested case proceeding
provided for in subrule 4.1(14) and rule 4.48(17A,85,86). The application and
consent order for payment of benefits under Iowa Code section 85.21 is to be
used for contested case proceedings brought under Iowa Code section 85.21. When
a commutation is sought, the Form No. 9 or Form No. 9A must be filed in addition
to any other document. The petition for declaratory ruling
order, approval of attorney fees, determination of compliance and other
proceedings not covered in the original notice forms must accompany the original
notice.
At the same time and in the same manner as service of the
original notice and petition, the claimant shall serve a patient’s waiver
using Form 309–5173 14–0043 (authorization
for release of information regarding claimants seeking workers’
compensation benefits) which shall not be revoked until conclusion of the
contested case.
ITEM 5. Amend rule
876—4.17(85,86,17A) as follows:
876—4.17(85,86,17A) Service of
medical records and reports. Each party to a contested
case shall serve all records received pursuant to a patient’s waiver
(Form 14–0043—authorization for release of information regarding
claimants seeking workers’ compensation benefits) and medical
rec–ords and reports concerning the injured worker in the possession of
the party upon each opposing party not later than 20 days following filing of an
answer or, if not then in possession of a party, within 10 days of receipt.
Medical records and reports are records of medical practitioners and
institutions concerning the injured worker. Medical practitioners and
institutions are medical doctors, osteopaths, chiropractors, dentists, nurses,
podiatrists, psychiatrists, psychologists, counselors, hospitals, clinics,
persons engaged in physical or vocational rehabilitation or evaluation for
rehabilitation, all other practitioners of the healing arts or sciences, and all
other institutions in which the healing arts or sciences are practiced. Each
party shall serve a notice accompanying the rec–ords and reports
identifying the records and reports served by the name of the practitioner or
institution or other source and date of the records and reports and, if
served later than 20 days following filing of the answer, stating the date when
the rec–ords and reports were received by the party serving them.
Pursuant to 4.14(86), the notice and records and reports shall not be filed with
the workers’ compensation commissioner. A party failing to comply with
the provisions of this rule shall, if the failure is prejudicial to an opposing
party, be subject to the provisions of 4.36(86). This rule does not require a
party to serve any medical record or report that was previously
served by another party in a contested case proceeding.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 86.8 and
86.18.
ITEM 6. Amend rule 876—4.38(17A) as
follows:
Amend subrules 4.38(2) and 4.38(4) as follows:
4.38(2) The term “personally investigated”
means taking affirmative steps to interview witnesses directly or to obtain
documents or other information directly. The term “personally
investigated” does not include general direction and supervision of
assigned investigators, unsolicited receipt of information which is relayed to
assigned investigators, review of another person’s investigative work
product in the course of determining whether there is probable cause to initiate
a proceeding, or exposure to factual information while performing other agency
functions, including fact gathering for purposes other than investigation of the
matter which culminates in a contested case. Factual information relevant to
the merits of a contested case received by a person who later serves as
presiding officer in that case shall be disclosed if required by Iowa Code
section 17A.17 as amended by 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1202, section
19, and rule 4.38(17A).
4.38(4) If a party asserts disqualification on any
appropriate ground, including those listed in subrule 4.38(1), the party shall
file a motion supported by an affidavit pursuant to 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1202, section 19, subsection 7 Iowa Code section
17A.17(7). The motion must be filed as soon as practicable after the reason
alleged in the motion becomes known to the party.
If, during the course of the hearing, a party first becomes
aware of evidence of bias or other grounds for disqualification, the party may
move for recusal but must establish the grounds by the introduction of evidence
into the record.
If the workers’ compensation commissioner, chief deputy
workers’ compensation commissioner or deputy workers’ compensation
commissioner determines that recusal is appropriate, that person shall withdraw.
If that person determines that withdrawal is not required, that person shall
enter an order to that effect.
Amend the implementation clause as follows:
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section 17A.17
as amended by 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1202, section
19.
ITEM 7. Amend rule 876—4.39(17A,86)
as follows:
876—4.39(17A,86) Filing by facsimile transmission
(fax). All documents filed with the agency pursuant to this chapter and
Iowa Code section 86.24 except an original notice and petition requesting a
contested case proceeding (see Iowa Code section 17A.12(9)) may be filed by
facsimile transmission (fax). A copy shall be filed for each case involved. A
document filed by fax is presumed to be an accurate reproduction of the
original. If a document filed by fax is illegible, a legible copy may be
substituted and the date of filing shall be the date the illegible copy was
received. The date of filing by fax is the date the document is received by the
agency. The agency will not provide a mailed file–stamped copy of
documents filed by fax. The agency fax number is
(515)281–6501.
ITEM 8. Amend subrule 5.8(1) as
follows:
5.8(1) Time frames for action. Within 30 days
after receipt of a petition for a declaratory order, the workers’
compensation commissioner or the commissioner’s designee shall take action
on the petition as required by 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1202, section 13,
subsection 5 Iowa Code section 17A.9(5).
ITEM 9. Amend rule 876—5.9(17A) as
follows:
Amend subrules 5.9(1) and 5.9(3) as follows:
5.9(1) The workers’ compensation commissioner
shall not issue a declaratory order where prohibited by 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1202, section 13, subsection 1 Iowa Code section
17A.9(1), and may refuse to issue a declaratory order on some or all
questions raised for the following reasons:
1. to 10. No change.
5.9(3) Filing of new petition. Refusal to
issue a declaratory order pursuant to this provision does not preclude the
filing of a new petition that seeks to eliminate the grounds for the
workers’ compensation commissioner’s refusal to issue a
ruling an order.
ITEM 10. Amend 876—Chapter 5
by amending the implementation clause as follows:
These rules are intended to implement 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1202, section 13 Iowa Code section 17A.9.
ITEM 11. Amend
876—8.9(85,86), second unnumbered paragraph, as follows:
A medical provider or its agent shall furnish an employer or
insurance carrier copies of the initial as well as final clinical assessment
without cost when the assessments are requested as supporting documentation to
determine liability or for payment of a medical provider’s bill for
medical services. When requested, a medical provider or its agent shall furnish
a legible duplicate of additional records or reports. Except as otherwise
provided in this rule, the amount to be paid for furnishing duplicates of
records or reports shall be the actual expense to prepare duplicates not to
exceed: $20 for 1 to 20 pages; $20 plus $1 per page for 21 to 30 pages; $30
plus $.50 per page for 31 to 100 pages; $65 plus $.25 per page for 101 to 200
pages; $90 plus $.10 per page for more than 200 pages, and the actual expense of
postage. No other expenses shall be allowed. On May 10, 1996, and on
an annual basis thereafter, the fee structure imposed shall be reviewed by the
commissioner to determine if the charges paid for duplication consistently
reflect the actual expense of a medical provider or its agent in providing
duplicates of rec–ords or reports.
ITEM 12. Amend rule
876—8.10(85B), implementation clause, as follows:
This rule is intended to implement 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1160, section 7, and Iowa Code section
sections 85B.9A and 86.8.
ITEM 13. Amend rule
876—9.1(17A,22,85–87), definition of “open
record,” as follows:
“Open record” means a record other than a
confidential record, including but not limited to the record of declaratory
rulings, declaratory orders, contested case proceedings, decisions, orders,
rulings, settlements, and opinions of the agency.
ITEM 14. Amend subrule 9.12(2) as
follows:
9.12(2) The record of declaratory rulings,
declaratory orders, contested case proceedings, decisions, orders, rulings,
settlements, and opinions are open for public inspection and copying.
ITEM 15. Amend subrule
9.13(1)“d”(6) as follows:
(6) Declaratory rulings and declaratory orders.
Records may contain information about persons making requests for declaratory
rulings, declaratory orders or comments from other persons concerning the
rulings or orders. This information is collected pursuant to Iowa Code
section 17A.9. These records may be stored in an automated data processing
system and may have the capability of retrieval by a personal
identifier.
ITEM 16. Amend 876—Chapter
12 by amending the implementation clause as follows:
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code
section sections 17A.4(1)“b” and 17A.7
as amended by 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1202, section
11.
FILED EMERGENCY
ARC 9774A
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
Board of Education hereby amends Chapter 6, “Appeal Procedures,”
Iowa Administrative Code.
In accordance with Iowa Code chapter 17A, these amendments add
procedures for contested case proceedings to the Department rules regarding
appealing proposed decisions. No waiver provision is included because the Board
of Education has adopted agencywide waiver rules.
In compliance with Iowa Code subsection 17A.4(2), the Board
finds that notice and public participation are unnecessary as the amendments
make departmental rules consistent with the Iowa administrative procedure
Act.
The Board also finds, pursuant to Iowa Code section
17A.5(2)“b”(2), that the normal effective date of these amendments,
35 days after publication, should be waived and these amendments should be made
effective upon filing on March 17, 2000, as they confer a benefit upon the
citizens of Iowa.
These amendments are also published herein under Notice of
Intended Action as ARC 9773A to allow for public comment.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
17A.4 and 290.1.
These amendments became effective March 17, 2000.
The following amendments are adopted.
Amend rule 281—6.17(290,17A) by adopting the following
new subrules and renumbering existing subrules 6.17(4) to
6.17(7) as 6.17(7) to 6.17(10):
6.17(4) Any adversely affected party may appeal a
proposed decision to the state board within 20 days after the date of the
proposed decision.
6.17(5) An appeal of a proposed decision is initiated
by filing a timely notice of appeal with the office of the director. The
notice of appeal must be signed by the appealing party or a representative of
that party and contain a certificate of service. The notice shall
specify:
a. The names and addresses of the parties initiating the
appeal;
b. The proposed decision to be appealed;
c. The specific findings or conclusions to which exception is
taken and any other exceptions to the decision;
d. The relief sought; and
e. The grounds for relief.
6.17(6) Unless otherwise ordered, within 15 days of
the party’s filing of the notice of appeal, each appealing party may file
exceptions and briefs. Within 10 days after the filing of exceptions and briefs
by the appealing party, any party may file a responsive brief. Briefs shall
cite any applicable legal authority and specify relevant portions of the record
in that proceeding. An opportunity for oral arguments may be given with the
consent of the board. Written requests to pre–sent oral argument shall be
filed with the briefs.
[Filed Emergency 3/17/00, effective 3/17/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9749A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1213,
section 9, the Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 25,
“Disability Services Management,” appearing in the Iowa
Administrative Code.
The Seventy–seventh General Assembly, in 1998 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1213, section 8, subsection 3, established a risk pool fund to be used
to cover an unanticipated cost in excess of a county’s current fiscal year
budget amount for the mental health, mental retardation, and developmental
disabilities services fund. Basic eligibility requires a projected need in
excess of the sum of 105 percent of the county’s current fiscal year
budget amount and any amount of the county’s prior fiscal year accrual
ending services fund balance in excess of 25 percent of the county’s gross
expenditures from the services fund in the prior fiscal year.
A Risk Pool Board was also established consisting of two
county supervisors, two county auditors, a member of the state–county
management committee created in Iowa Code section 331.438 who was not appointed
by the Iowa State Association of Counties, a member of the county finance
committee created in Iowa Code chapter 333A who is not an elected official, and
two single entry point process administrators, all appointed by the Governor,
subject to confirmation by two–thirds of the members of the Senate, and
one member appointed by the director of the Department ofHuman Services.
Members of the Board were appointed by the Governor in October of 1999 and their
names submitted to the Senate in November of 1999. The Board held its first
meeting in January of 2000.
Any county wishing to receive assistance from the risk pool
must apply to the Risk Pool Board by April 1. The legislature appropriated $2
million for the fund for fiscal year 2000 and $2 million for fiscal year 2001.
The total amount of risk pool assistance to counties shall be limited to the
amount available in the risk pool for a fiscal year. If the total amount of
eligible assistance exceeds the amount available in the risk pool, the amount of
assistance paid shall be prorated among the counties eligible for assistance.
There are provisions for repaying the risk pool funds under specified
conditions.
These rules establish the Risk Pool Board to administer the
risk pool fund established by the legislature and the requirements for counties
to receive assistance from the fund.
These rules do not provide for waivers in specified situations
because the requirements for composition of the risk pool and Risk Pool Board,
eligibility for funds, and for awarding and repayment of funds are all stated in
the Iowa Code. These requirements cannot be waived by rule.
In compliance with Iowa Code section 17A.4(2), the Department
of Human Services finds that notice and public participation are unnecessary
because these rules implement 1998 Iowa Acts, chapter 1213, section 9, which
authorizes the Department to adopt rules without notice and public
participation.
The Department also finds, pursuant to Iowa Code section
17A.5(2)“b”(1), that the normal effective date of these rules should
be waived and these rules made effective March 8, 2000, as authorized by 1998
Iowa Acts, chapter 1213, section 9.
These rules are also published herein under Notice of Intended
Action as ARC 9748A to allow for public comment.
The Mental Health and Developmental Disabilities Commission
adopted these rules March 7, 2000.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
426B.5, subsection 3.
These rules became effective March 8, 2000.
The following rules are adopted.
ITEM 1. Reserve rules
441—25.56 to 441—25.60.
ITEM 2. Amend 441—Chapter 25
by adopting the following new Division V.
DIVISION V
RISK POOL
FUNDING
PREAMBLE
These rules establish a risk pool board to administer the risk
pool fund established by the legislature and the requirements for counties for
receiving and repaying funding from the fund.
441—25.61(426B) Definitions.
“Aggregate application” means the request for
funding when a county has an unanticipated cost for mental health, mental
retardation, and developmental disabilities services fund expenditures that
would result in the county’s current fiscal year budget exceeding the sum
of 105 percent of the county’s current fiscal year budget amount and the
county’s prior fiscal year accrual ending fund balance exceeding 25
percent of the prior fiscal year gross services fund expenditures.
“Available pool” means those funds remaining in
the risk pool less any actuarial and other direct administrative
costs.
“Commission” means the mental health and
developmental disabilities commission.
“Division” means the mental health and
developmental disabilities division of the department of human
services.
“Individual application” means the request for
funding when a county has individuals who have unanticipated disability
conditions with an exceptional cost and the individuals are either new to the
county’s service system or the individuals’ disability conditions
have changed or are new.
“Loan” means the risk pool funds a county received
in a fiscal year in which the county did not levy the maximum amount allowed for
the county’s mental health, mental retardation, and developmental
disabilities services fund under Iowa Code section 331.424A.
441—25.62(426B) Risk pool board. This
nine–member board consists of two county supervisors, two county auditors,
a member of the state–county management committee created in Iowa Code
section 331.438 who was not appointed by the Iowa state association of counties,
a member of the county finance committee created in Iowa Code chapter 333A who
is not an elected official, and two single entry point process administrators,
all appointed by the governor, sub–ject to confirmation by
two–thirds of the members of the senate, and one member appointed by the
director of the department of human services.
25.62(1) Organization.
a. The members of the board shall annually elect from the
board’s voting membership a chairperson and vice–chairperson of the
board.
b. Members appointed by the governor shall serve
three–year terms.
25.62(2) Duties and powers of the board. The
board’s powers and duties are to make policy and to provide direction for
the administration of the risk pool established by Iowa Code section 426B.5,
subsection 3. In carrying out these duties, the board shall do all of the
following:
a. Recommend to the commission for adoption rules governing
the risk pool fund.
b. Determine application requirements to ensure prudent use of
risk pool assistance.
c. Accept or reject applications for assistance in whole or in
part.
d. Review the fiscal year–end financial records for all
counties that are granted risk pool assistance and determine if repayment is
required.
e. Approve actuarial and other direct administrative costs to
be paid from the pool.
25.62(3) Board action.
a. A quorum shall consist of two–thirds of the
membership appointed and qualified to vote.
b. When a quorum is present, an action is carried by a
majority of the qualified members of the board.
25.62(4) Board minutes.
a. Copies of administrative rules and other materials
considered are made part of the minutes by reference.
b. Copies of the minutes are kept on file in the office of the
administrator of the division of mental health and developmental
disabilities.
25.62(5) Board meetings.
a. The board shall meet in April of each year and may hold
special meetings at the call of the chairperson or at the request of a majority
of the voting members.
b. Any county making application for risk pool funds must be
present at the board meeting where that request will be considered. The
division shall notify the county of the date, time and location of the meeting.
Any other persons with questions about the date, time or location of the meeting
may contact the Administrator, Division of Mental Health and Developmental
Disabilities, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office Building, Fifth
Floor, 1305 East Walnut, Des Moines, Iowa 50309–0114, telephone (515)
281–5874.
c. The board shall comply with applicable provisions of
Iowa’s open meetings law, Iowa Code chapter 21.
25.62(6) Records. Any records maintained by the board
or on behalf of the board shall be made available to the public for examination
in compliance with Iowa’s open records law, Iowa Code chapter 22. To the
extent possible, prior to submitting applications, records and documents,
applicants shall delete any confidential information. These records shall be
maintained in the office of the division of mental health and developmental
disabilities.
25.62(7) Conflict of interest. A board member cannot
be a part of any presentation to the board of that board member’s
county’s application for risk pool funds nor can the board member be a
part of any action pertaining to that application.
25.62(8) Robert’s Rules of Order. In cases not
covered by these rules, Robert’s Rules of Order shall govern.
441—25.63(426B) Application process.
25.63(1) Who may apply. A county may make an
aggregate or individual application at any time on or before April 1 of any
given year for the current fiscal year budget whenever the projected need
exceeds the sum of 105 percent of the county’s current fiscal year budget
amount and the county’s prior fiscal year accrual ending fund balance
exceeds 25 percent of the prior fiscal year gross services fund
expenditures.
The purpose of the mental health risk pool is to assist
counties whose expenditures in the mental health, mental retardation, and
developmental disabilities services fund exceed budgeted costs due to
unanticipated expenses for new individuals or other unexpected factors. The
mental health risk pool is not intended for multiyear usage or as a source of
planned revenue.
25.63(2) How to apply. The county shall send Form
470–3723, Risk Pool Application, plus 15 copies, to the division. The
division must receive the application no later than 4:30 p.m. on April 1 of each
year; or, if April 1 is a holiday, a Saturday or Sunday, the division must
receive the application no later than 4:30 p.m. on the first working day
following. Facsimiles and electronic mail are not acceptable. The application
shall be signed and dated by both the chairperson of the county board of
supervisors and the central point of coordination administrator. Staff of the
division shall notify each county of receipt of the county’s
application.
The county shall attach the following forms to the
application:
a. Form 634A, Revenues Detail.
b. Form 634B, Service Area Detail (pages 1 to 10).
c. Form 634C, Service Area 4 Supporting Detail (pages 1 to
8).
d. Form 638R, Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes
in Fund Balance—Actual and Budget (2 pages).
e. If the budget has been amended, Form 653A–R, Record
of Hearing and Determination on the Amendment to County Budget (sheet 2), for
both the current fiscal year budget, as last amended, and the prior fiscal year
gross services fund expenditures.
25.63(3) Request for additional information. Staff
shall review all applications for completeness. If an application is not
complete, staff of the division shall contact the county within four working
days after April 1 or the first working day thereafter, if April 1 is a holiday,
a Saturday or Sunday, and request the information needed to complete the
application. The county shall submit the required information within five
working days from the date of the division’s request for the additional
information.
441—25.64(426B) Methodology for awarding risk pool
funding.
25.64(1) Notice of decision. The risk pool board
shall notify the chair of the applying county’s board of supervisors of
the board’s action. Copies shall be sent to the county auditor and the
central point of coordination administrator.
25.64(2) Distribution of funds. The total amount of
the risk pool shall be limited to the available pool for a fiscal year. If the
total dollar amount of the approved applications exceeds the available pool, the
board shall prorate the amount paid for an approved application. The funds will
be prorated to each county based upon the proportion each approved
county’s request is of the total amount of all approved
requests.
441—25.65(426B) Repayment provisions.
25.65(1) Required repayment. Counties shall be
required to repay risk pool funds in the following situations:
a. A loan was granted to the county because the county did not
levy the maximum amount allowed for the county’s mental health, mental
retardation, and developmental disabilities services fund under Iowa Code
section 331.424A. The county shall be required to repay the risk pool loan
funds in the succeeding fiscal year.
b. The county had levied the maximum amount allowed for the
county’s mental health, mental retardation, and developmental disabilities
services fund, but the county’s actual need for risk pool assistance was
less than the amount of risk pool assistance granted to the county. The county
shall refund the difference between the amount of assistance granted and the
actual need.
25.65(2) Year–end report. Each county granted
risk pool funds shall complete a year–end financial report. The division
shall review the accrual information and notify the mental health risk pool
board if any county that was granted assistance in the prior year received more
than the county’s actual need based on the submitted financial
report.
25.65(3) Notification to county. The chairperson of
the mental health risk pool board shall notify each county by January 1 of each
fiscal year of the amount to be reimbursed. The county shall reimburse the risk
pool within 30 days of receipt of notification by the chairperson of the mental
health risk pool board. If a county fails to reimburse the mental health risk
pool, the board may request a revenue offset through the department of revenue
and finance. Copies of the overpayment and request for reimbursement shall be
sent to the county auditor and the central point of coordination administrator
of the county.
441—25.66(426B) Appeals. The risk pool board
may accept or reject an application for assistance from the risk pool fund in
whole or in part. The decision of the board is final and is not
appealable.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
426B.5, subsection 3.
[Filed Emergency 3/8/00, effective 3/8/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9751A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 234.6,
239B.4(4), and 249A.4, the Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter
41, “Granting Assistance,” Chapter 65, “Administration,”
and Chapter 75, “Conditions of Eligibility,” appearing in the Iowa
Administrative Code.
The United States Department of Agriculture has notified the
Department of Human Services that the Department has the option of exempting,
for food stamp purposes, the earnings of persons who are temporarily employed by
the Bureau of the Census during the period from April 1, 2000, through January
31, 2001. The United States Department of Agriculture is allowing this
exemption at the request of the Bureau of the Census as an incentive for persons
to take census employment. The Department of Human Services has decided to take
this option and exempt census income for food stamp recipients.
The Department has made the decision to also exempt the census
income for the Family Investment Program, the Family Medical Assistance Program,
and for FMAP–related Medicaid programs to match food stamp
policy.
These amendments do not provide for waiver in specified
situations because federal food stamp law does not allow for any waivers and
these amendments only provide additional benefits.
The Department of Human Services finds that notice and public
participation are impracticable because there is not time to allow public
comment and participation and have these amendments effective by April 1, 2000,
when the census will begin. Therefore, these amendments are filed pursuant to
Iowa Code section 17A.4(2).
The Department finds that these amendments confer a benefit on
the clients involved as this income will not adversely affect their eligibility
and benefits. Therefore, these amendments are filed pursuant to Iowa Code
section 17A.5(2)“b”(2).
These amendments are also published herein under Notice of
Intended Action as ARC 9750A to allow for public comment.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
8, 2000.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
234.12, 239B.2(2), 239B.7, and 249A.4.
These amendments became effective April 1, 2000.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 41.27(7) by
adopting the following new paragraph
“ak”:
ak. All census earnings received by temporary workers from the
Bureau of the Census for Census 2000 during the period of April 1, 2000, through
January 31, 2001.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 65.29(3) as
follows:
65.29(3) Exclusion of income from
1990 2000 census employment. Any
compensation All earnings received from the
United States Department of Commerce resulting from employment in the 1990
Decennial Census by temporary workers from the Bureau of the Census
for Census 2000during the period of April 1, 2000, through January 31, 2001,
shall be excluded from income.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 75.57(7) by
adopting the following new paragraph
“ah”:
ah. All census earnings received by temporary workers from the
Bureau of the Census for Census 2000 during the period of April 1, 2000, through
January 31, 2001.
[Filed Emergency 3/8/00, effective 4/1/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9771A
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby amends Chapter 34, “Community
Forestry Challenge Grant Program (CFCGP),” Iowa Administrative
Code.
This amendment clarifies the rules for community tree planting
grants and expands sources of funding.
In compliance with Iowa Code section 17A.4(2), the Commission
finds that notice and public participation are impracticable because of the
immediate need for changes in the rules to help clarify the grant program
rules.
The Commission also finds, pursuant to Iowa Code section
17A.5(2)“b”(2), that the normal effective date of the amendment
should be waived and this amendment should be made effective upon filing with
the Administrative Rules Coordinator on March 17, 2000, as it confers a benefit
upon communities and organizations by making it easier to apply for and utilize
the community tree planting grants program.
The Natural Resource Commission adopted this amendment on
March 9, 2000.
This amendment is also published herein under Notice of
Intended Action as ARC 9770A to allow public comment.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
456A.20 and 461A.2.
This amendment became effective March 17, 2000.
The following amendment is adopted.
Amend 571—Chapter 34 as follows:
CHAPTER 34
COMMUNITY FORESTRY
CHALLENGE
GRANT PROGRAM (CFCGP)
(CFGP)
571—34.1(461A) Purpose. The purpose of this
chapter is to define procedures for cost sharing between state and local public
agencies or volunteer organizations to assist them in developing comprehensive
community street and park tree programs or to establish a one–time
demonstration community tree planting projects on public lands
within that benefit the citizens of the state of
Iowa.
571—34.2(461A) Definitions.
“Administrator” means the administrator of the
forestry division of the department, also known as the state forester.
“CFCGP” “CFGP”
means the community forestry challenge grant program.
“Community” means an incorporated city, town or
village within the state of Iowa.
“Department” means the Iowa department of natural
resources.
“Director” means the director of the Iowa
department of natural resources.
“Division” means the forestry division of the Iowa
department of natural resources.
“Iowa urban and community forestry council” means
the group of professionals and volunteer leaders selected by the forestry
division administrator to advise the division on urban and community forestry
programs, also known as the council.
“Organization” means governmental or
nongovernmental agencies, formal groups such as service clubs and other
volunteer groups.
“Public lands” means land owned by state,
county or local governments.
“Urban and community forestry” means the planning,
planting and maintenance of trees in communities or public recreation
areas.
571—34.3(461A) Availability of funds. Funds to
institute the CFCGP CFGP program are
may be derived through federal allocations pursuant to Section 9 of the
Cooperative Forestry Assistance Act (16 U.S.C. 2105), from state legislative
allocations and other sources.
571—34.4(461A) Eligibility of forestry
developmentprojects. Forestry development grants (maximum $5,000) may
include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Hiring a new full– or part–time city
forester.
2. Internships for forestry, horticulture or landscape
architect to perform community forestry work.
3. Completing a 100 percent street and park tree
inventory.
4. City tree ordinance development or revision.
5. City employee or volunteer community forestry
training.
6. Development of community forestry master plans.
7. Community forestry youth and adult education
programs.
8. City forestry planting site design development.
571—34.5(461A) Eligibility of
demonstration community tree planting projects. A
one–time cost–share grant (maximum
$3,000 $5,000) is available per for
a community orvolunteer organization for a
demonstration landscape and conservation tree planting
project projects. that may include, but is
not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Tree or landscape plantings on public
areas.
2. Tree or landscape maintenance projects on public
areas.
3. Site improvements around public
trees.
4. Site developments around public
trees.
5. Construction mitigation around public
trees.
571—34.6(461A) Projects not eligible. The
following types of projects are not eligible for assistance from the
CFCGP CFGP:
1. Acquisition of land.
2. Replacement of normally allocated local government
funds.
3. Any type of development or planting that will not improve
public enjoyment, access, benefits or safety.
4. Projects with a total grant request of less than
$500.
5. Any project or project costs incurred prior to notification
of the sponsoring agency by the forestry division administrator that a grant has
been approved.
571—34.7(461A) Eligible applicants. Eligible
projects may be submitted by regional or local units of Iowa state, county or
city government, local governmental departments, school districts, volunteer
organizations and service clubs involved with local urban and community forestry
resources. Eligible projects must occur within the state of Iowa.
571—34.8(461A) Establishing project priorities.
The forestry division administrator shall appoint a three member
challenge grant committee minimum three–member ranking
committee representing a cross section of the Iowa urban and community
forestry council for the purpose of reviewing, establishing priorities for cost
sharing and ranking applications for approval by the administrator. This
committee will review and rank all proposals received on a competitive basis
for: demonstrated need, cash match, community involvement, new
project, cost effectiveness, meeting Tree City USA requirements, and
having a completed community tree assessment or inventory storm
damage documentation and other issues pertinent to urban forestry in
Iowa.
571—34.9(461A) Application procedures.
Announcements concerning the application procedures will be issued by the
administrator each year. A maximum four–page
six–page proposal must be received by the Forestry Division
Administrator, Wallace State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034,
no later than 4:30 p.m. on the last working day identified in the announcement.
The proposal should briefly describe the eligible applicant,
and detail project request, total budget, source of match and completion
date. For demonstration community tree planting
projects, an 8”
? 11” site
map must be included in addition to the proposal.
This proposal must be signed by an authorized official of
state, regional or local government under whose jurisdiction the project will
occur, indicating that the project funds will be spent in accordance with the
proposal and all applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations. The
applicant must sign a statement relinquishing the department or the Iowa urban
and community forestry council from any liability associated with this
project.
571—34.10(461A) Requirements for funding. In
order to qualify for funding, state, regional or local units of government,
school districts, volunteer organizations and service clubs must comply with the
following requirements:
34.10(1) The project(s) must be on public land within
the state of Iowa (for example, streets, boulevards, parks, schools,
cemeteries).
34.10(2) A 50–50 $1 for
$1 minimum match of requested funds is required.
34.10(3) In–kind contributions are allowed
for the forestry development projects only if specific for the proposed
project. Tree planting projects require cash match $1 for $1 only.
The entire 50 percent match may be in kind contributions.
These All in–kind costs for the forestry development
projects must be documented. Allowable in–kind costs include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a. Volunteer labor (reasonable local rates).
b. Value of locally purchased or donated trees to be planted
on public areas.
c. Value of wood mulch and other tree protective devices
(reasonable local rates).
34.10(4) Only plant materials, products and services
purchased from Iowa firms are eligible for demonstration
tree planting projects. Shrubs and nonwoody plants are eligible
if in combination with trees.
571—34.11(461A) Project agreements.
34.11(1) A cooperative agreement approved by the
administrator between the department and the local grant recipient
describing the work to be accomplished and specifying the amount of the grant
and the project completion date will be negotiated as soon as possible after a
grant has been approved. Maximum time period for project completion shall be
18 months stated in the grant announcement, unless an
extension approved by the administrator is authorized.
34.11(2) Cooperative agreements between the department
and the local project grant recipient may be amended to
increase or decrease project scope or to increase or decrease project costs and
fund assistance. Any increase in fund assistance will be subject to the
availability of federal funds. Amendments to increase scope or
fund assistance must be approved by the administrator before work is commenced
or additional costs are incurred.
571—34.12(461A) Reimbursement procedures.
Financial assistance from the community forestry challenge
grant program will be in the form of reimbursement grants which will be made on
the basis of the approved percentage of all eligible expenditures up to the
amount of the approved grant.
Reimbursement requests must be submitted by the grant
recipient on project billing forms provided by the department at the completion
of the project.
For forestry development projects and
demonstration community tree planting projects, grant
recipients shall provide documentation as required by the department to
substantiate all project expenditures.
Tree planting grant recipient organizations must be willing
to sign a ten–year maintenance agreement for trees planted on public lands
before reimbursement of costs is approved.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
461A.2.
[Filed Emergency 3/17/00, effective 3/17/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
FILED
ARC 9752A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 217.6, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 53, “Rent Subsidy
Program,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
8, 2000. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 26, 2000, as ARC
9612A.
The rent subsidy program is designed to provide
rentalassistance to persons who participate in a home–
andcommunity–based service (HCBS) waiver program and who were discharged
from a medical institution in which they have resided, at risk of institutional
placement, or able to leave a medical institution by use of services provided
under an HCBS waiver upon turning 18 years of age during the last year of their
institutional stay.
An eligible person may receive assistance in meeting rental
expense and, in the initial two months of eligibility, in purchasing necessary
household furnishings and supplies.
These amendments revise policy governing the rent subsidy
program as follows:
• The basis of the maximum
rental assistance payment is increased from 100 percent to 110 percent of the
maximum prevailing fair market rent under guidelines of the applicable United
States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) low–rent housing
program in the area where the person’s residence is located, less 30
percent of the gross income of the individual consumer.
The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD)
published interim regulations in the May 14, 1999, Federal Register at 24 CFR
982.503(b) and final regulations in the October 21, 1999, Federal Register
allowing public housing authorities to establish the payment standard amount for
a unit size at any level between 90 percent and 110 percent of the published
Fair Market Rental for that unit size. The Department has decided to use the
maximum guideline established by HUD to establish the amount of the rental
assistance.
This change will, in most cases, result in increased monthly
payments to participants. This increase is the same as would be experienced by
participants in the federal rental assistance program, and makes the
Department’s program consistent with the federal program payment
structure.
• Time–limited policy
regarding eligibility criteria that is no longer in effect is deleted.
• The reference to
one–bedroom homes is clarified.
• Statutory references are
updated.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because they only provide additional benefits, delete an outdated
provision, clarify language, and update statutory references.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
217.6 and 1999 Iowa Acts, chapter 203, section 11, subsection 3.
These amendments shall become effective June 1,
2000.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend the parenthetical
implementation following each rule in 441—Chapter 53 as
follows:
(77GA,ch1218 78GA,ch203)
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 53.2(2) as
follows:
53.2(2) Discharged from a medical institution. Except
as provided in subrules 53.2(4) and 53.2(5), the person shall have been
discharged from a medical institution on or after July 1, 1995, and immediately
prior to receiving HCBS services. For a period of 60 days after April
1, 1999, persons who were discharged from a medical institution immediately
prior to entering an HCBS program between July 1, 1995, and June 30, 1996, shall
receive first consideration for eligibility and participation in this program if
they demonstrate a need for rental assistance. These persons shall not replace
anyone who is actively participating in this program at the time of their
application. During this 60–day period, applications may be submitted by
anyone, although first consideration will be given to the persons described
above, whose applications will be acted upon in the order they are received. At
the end of the 60–day period, all applications received during that time
from persons not described above shall be considered in the chronological order
that they were received and, if applicable, participation in the program shall
be approved retroactive to the date that would have been allowed had an
application been processed immediately on receipt.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 53.3(2) as
follows:
53.3(2) Date of application. The date of the
application shall be the date the application, including written verification of
income and written verification of application to other rental assistance
programs, is received by the division of mental health and developmental
disabilities. Applications received through June 30, 1999, on behalf of
persons who would have met all of the qualifying criteria between July 1, 1998,
and their date of application will be assessed for payment consideration
retroactive to July 1, 1998, or the date between July 1, 1998, and the date of
application on which the applicant would have met all eligibility
criteria.
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 53.4(2) as
follows:
53.4(2) Maximum monthly payment for rent. Assistance
for rent shall be equal to the rent paid, not to exceed 110 percent of
the maximum prevailing fair market rent under guidelines of the applicable
United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) low–rent
housing program in the area where the person’s residence is located, less
30 percent of the gross income of the individual consumer. The fair market rent
used shall be that for a one–bedroom home or a proportionate
share of rental costs in living units containing more than one
bedroom.
ITEM 5. Amend 441—Chapter
53, implementation clause, as follows:
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 217.6
and 1998 1999 Iowa Acts, chapter 1218
203, section 11, subsection 3.
[Filed 3/8/00, effective 6/1/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9753A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 234.6, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 114, “Licensing and
Regulation of All Group Living Foster Care Facilities for Children,” and
Chapter 185, “Rehabilitative Treatment Services,” appearing in the
Iowa Administrative Code.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
8, 2000. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 26, 2000, as ARC
9614A.
These amendments revise the placement criteria in Chapter 185
for children to be served in a highly structured residential facility and
establish criteria for readmission to the program. An exception process is also
added for children who do not meet the placement criteria. The definition of
“highly structured juvenile program” in Chapter 114 is revised to
remove duplicative policy.
Highly structured juvenile programs, more commonly known as
boot camps, are programs lasting 90 days, which have a high degree of structure
that stresses discipline, physical activity, and education.
Current policy requires that young men admitted to highly
structured group foster care be 15 to 17 years old; be adjudicated delinquent on
a charge that is at least an aggravated misdemeanor, but is not a forcible
felony; be unable to live in a family situation due to severe social, emotional,
and behavioral disabilities; and not be entering the program within 60 days of
another residential placement.
Young men who do not meet these criteria enter the program by
a Director’s exception to policy as set forth at rule 441—1.8(217).
There has been a substantial volume of admission by exceptions, particularly for
boys who have been adjudicated delinquent for crimes less serious than
aggravated misdemeanors.
These amendments maintain the age criteria. A requirement
that the adjudicated crime be at least a serious misdemeanor has been
substituted for the current requirement of an aggravated misdemeanor. In
addition, the prohibition against entering the program within 60 days of another
residential placement has been deleted and a requirement is added that youth not
be able to benefit from further community–based services at the time of
placement, but be able to successfully return to the community following
intensive short–term residential treatment.
These amendments also change the process by which exceptions
are granted. Young men who meet the criteria for admission will be deemed part
of the target population for admission. Candidates for admission who are not
part of the target population may be admitted with the approval of a Department
regional administrator or designee. A regional administrator or designee may
delegate this authority to the chief juvenile court officers or designees. The
Department and juvenile court services will be required to keep data on the
children placed who lack one or more of the target population
characteristics.
The proposed target populations better identify the categories
of young men most likely to benefit from the rigor and structure of these
programs. The new process for exceptions to policy will have two benefits: it
will translate into policy current best practice in providing this type of
residential program to those most likely to benefit from it, and it will save
caseworker time in processing exceptions.
The Department has also had several requests for exceptions to
policy to allow readmission to the programs. These amendments provide that
program participants may be readmitted to the program for an additional 30, 60,
or 90 days. A readmission shall be decided upon and processed in the same
manner as the original admission, using the same criteria. A readmission should
be a rare occurrence, used only when troublesome behaviors, diagnoses or
problems arise late in the original placement, and more time in the program will
benefit the child.
The Department and juvenile court services are required to
keep data on the children placed who lack one or more of the target population
characteristics and on the children who are readmitted to a program.
These amendments do provide a process for waiver of the highly
structured juvenile program admission criteria by Department regional
administrators or their designees or, if so delegated, by chief juvenile court
officers or their designees. Individuals may request a waiver of other criteria
under the Department’s general rule on exceptions at rule 441—
1.8(217).
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
234.38 and 237.3.
These amendments shall become effective June 1,
2000.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
441—114.2(237), definition of “highly structured juvenile
program,” as follows:
“Highly structured juvenile program” means a
short–term treatment program for adjudicated delinquent
youth, aged 15 to 17, who are unable to live in a family situation due to severe
social, emotional and behavioral disabilities, who have not experienced a
residential placement in the last 60 days, have a prior adjudication of
delinquency, have committed a public offense that is an aggravated misdemeanor
or above, and have not committed a forcible felony. These programs
have lasting 90 days and having a high degree of structure that
stresses discipline, physical activity, and education, and are
short–term placements with a length of stay of 90 days. Program
participants are assembled in cohorts (groups of youth adjudicated delinquent as
to the criteria listed above) which are managed by the juvenile court. Each
cohort is a number that is one–third of the program, with a cohort
scheduled to finish the 90–day program every 30 days. Discharge planning
must be started within the first 30 calendar days of placement. Specialized
behavior management techniques are used several times per day. In addition,
youth receiving the highly structured juvenile program shall require and receive
treatment several times daily to enhance their social skills. In addition to
the intensive programming and structure, the youth are provided 24–hour
awake supervision.
These programs must be licensed as either community
residential facilities under this chapter or as comprehensive residential
facilities under 441—Chapter 115 and certifiedto provide rehabilitative
treatment services under 441— Chapter 185. Programs shall have the
ability to use a physically secure setting dependent upon the level of the
license.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 185.83(4) as
follows:
185.83(4) Highly structured juvenile program. A
highly structured juvenile program provides treatment in a facility
licensed under 441—Chapter 114 or 115 for adjudicated delinquent youth
from the ages of 15 to 17 years who are unable to live in a family situation due
to severe social, emotional and behavioral disabilities and who have not
experienced a residential placement in the last 60 days must meet
the following requirements for licensing, admissions, readmission and discharge,
and program and services. The youth require a high degree of
supervision, and a structure that stresses discipline, physical activity,
education, and social skill development due to their aggressive behavior which
includes a prior adjudication of delinquency and commitment of a public offense
that is an aggravated misdemeanor or above, but not a forcible
felony.
a. Licensing. Facilities shall be licensed under
441— Chapter 114 or 115.
b. Admission criteria. Characteristics of the target
population to be served by this program include young men who:
(1) Are aged 15, 16, or 17.
(2) Have been adjudicated delinquent for a public offense
that is a serious misdemeanor or above, but is not a forcible
felony.
(3) Are not able to benefit further from
community–based services at the time of placement, but would be able to
successfully return to the community following intensive short–term
residential treatment.
Regional administrators for the department, in consultation
with juvenile court services, shall have authority to place youth that lack one
or more target population characteristics on a case–by–case basis.
A regional administrator or designee may delegate this authority to the chief
juvenile court officers or their designees. The department and juvenile court
services shall keep data on the children placed who lack one or more of the
target population characteristics.
c. Readmission and discharge. Program participants may be
readmitted to the program for an additional 30, 60, or 90 days. A readmission
shall be decided upon and processed in the same manner as the original
admission, using the same criteria. A readmission should be a rare occurrence,
used only when troublesome behaviors, diagnoses or problems arise late in the
original placement, and more time in the program will benefit the child. The
department and juvenile court services shall keep data on the children
readmitted to the program.
There are no temporary discharges from the highly
structured program to detention or other placement for discipline
purposes.
d. Program and services. This program is a
short–term treatment program with a length of stay of 90 days. Program
participants are assembled in cohorts (groups of youth adjudicated
delinquent as to the criteria listed above that advance through the
program together) which are managed by the juvenile court.
Each cohort is a number that is one–third of the program, with a cohort
scheduled to finish the 90–day program in 30 days. Discharge planning
must be started within the first 30 calendar days of placement.
Specialized behavior management techniques are used
several times per day. In addition, youth receiving the highly structured
juvenile program shall require and receive treatment several times daily to
enhance their social skills. In addition to the intensive programming and
structure, the youth are provided 24–hour awake
supervision.
a. (1) Youth in the highly
structured juvenile program shall receive the following
services: restorative living skills development as needed and social
skills development several times per day.
(2) One hour of therapy and counseling services shall
be provided every week to each youth.
b. (3) The prime programming time
hours and staff–to–client ratio shall meet the treatment and
supervision needs of the youth served as specified in
185.10(8)“c”(4).
c. (4) The payment for the daily rate
shall be calculated based on a 30–day month. If, however, the department
is able to provide payment based on the actual number of days in a month, rates
shall be adjusted accordingly.
d. (5) The unit of service for highly
structured juvenile residential treatment shall be one day.
e. (6) Services shall be provided on a
face–to–face basis with the child.
f. (7) Duration shall not exceed three
calendar months.
(8) Youth shall have supervision 24 hours a day by awake
staff.
[Filed 3/8/00, effective 6/1/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9754A
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 234.6, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 152,
“Contracting,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
8, 2000. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 26, 2000, as ARC
9615A.
These amendments allow the effective date of a rehabilitative
treatment and supportive services contract to be theday following the final
signing by the Department Director or designee unless a later effective date is
agreed upon by the provider and the Department. Current policy requires the
contract to be effective the first day of the month following
signature.
The Department is seeking to shorten time frames for approving
contracts in order to facilitate access to services. This change may reduce the
time from final signature of a contract by the Director to the effective date by
up to 30 days.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because providers may request a waiver of the contract effective date
under the Department’s general rule on exceptions at rule
441—1.8(217).
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
234.6.
These amendments shall become effective June 1,
2000.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule 441—152.8(234)
as follows:
441—152.8(234) Term of contract. The term of
the contract shall be for not more than two years, effective the
first day of the month following the signature
of the director of the department or the director’s designee, unless
the provider and department agree to a later specified date.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 152.22(6) as
follows:
152.22(6) Contract effective date. When the
agreed–upon contract conditions have been met, the effective date of
the a new contract, a renewed contract or an
amendment to add a new service code to the contract is the
first day of an agreed–upon month
following signature of the director of the department or the director’s
designee, unless the provider and the department agree to a later specified
date. A contract can only be effective if signed by all parties as required
in subrule 152.22(4).
[Filed 3/8/00, effective 6/1/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9763A
NURSING BOARD[655]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 17A.3 and
147.76, the Board of Nursing hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 2,
“Nursing Education Programs,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments establish a performance standard for
graduates of board–approved programs on the national licensure examination
(NCLEX) for registered nurses and licensed practical nurses.
These amendments were published in the Iowa Administrative
Bulletin on January 12, 2000, as ARC 9607A. These amendments are
identical to those published under Notice.
These amendments will become effective May 10, 2000.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
152.5.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
655—2.1(152) by adopting the following new definition
in alphabetical order:
NCLEX. NCLEX means National Council Licensure Examination,
the currently used examination.
ITEM 2. Adopt the following
new rule 655—2.10(152) and renumber rule
655—2.10(152) as 655—2.11(152):
655—2.10(152) Results of graduates who take the
licensure examination for the first time. The program shall notify the
board when the program or district national licensure examination passing
percentage is lower than 95 percent of the national passing percentage for two
consecutive calendar years. The NCLEX passing percentage shall be based on all
first–time applicants for RN or LPN licensure in any jurisdiction who take
the examination within six months of graduation. Upon notification by the
program, the board shall implement the following process:
1. The program shall submit to the board within six months an
institutional plan for assessment and improvement of NCLEX results, including
outcomes and time lines. The plan shall address administration, faculty,
students, curriculum, resources, policies and the nursing advisory
committee.
2. The program shall submit annual progress reports to the
board while the NCLEX passing percentage remains below 95 percent of the
national passing percentage.
3. The board may initiate provisional program approval as
specified in subrule 2.2(3) if the program or district NCLEX average does not
equal or exceed 95 percent of the national passing percentage within two
calendar years.
[Filed 3/16/00, effective 5/10/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9759A
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 136C.3, the
Department of Public Health adopts amendments to Chapter 38, “General
Provisions”; Chapter 39, “Registration of Radiation Machine
Facilities, Licensure of Radioactive Materials and Transportation of Radioactive
Materials”; Chapter 40, “Standards for Protection Against
Radiation”; Chapter 41, “Safety Requirements for the Use of
Radiation Machines and Certain Uses of Radioactive Materials”; Chapter 42,
“Minimum Certification Standards for Diagnostic Radiographers, Nuclear
Medicine Technologists, and Radiation Therapists”; Chapter 45,
“Radiation Safety Requirements for Industrial Radiographic
Operations”; and Chapter 46, “Minimum Requirements for Tanning
Facilities,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The following itemizes the adopted amendments.
Item 1 changes the title of Chapter 38 to clarify that these
general provisions apply to radiation machines and radioactive
materials.
Items 2, 9, 24, 37, and 103 amend the rules to reflect current
federal codes.
Items 3, 25, 39, 40, 56, 64, and 65 move definitions from
Chapters 39 to 45 to Chapter 38 because they apply to and are used in more than
one chapter. Some of the definitions are amended or new definitions are adopted
because of agreements with the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) and Food and
Drug Administration (FDA) that require that the agency adopt certain
language.
Items 4, 38, 50, 55, 63, 75, and 100 apply language that will
allow the rules to apply to all chapters for which the agency is
responsible.
Item 5 adds fees for food sterilization and bone densitometry
which are new categories. Bone densitometry was previously included in Category
1 of the annual fee schedule. The fee for food sterilization is based on the
time required to review the approval requests and oversee testing. After the
Administrative Rules Review Committee review, there was a question regarding the
fee increase for food sterilization from $80 to $1000. The increase is
necessary to recover costs based on the time spent on review for the first food
sterilization unit. The approval process staff time increased considerably
because of the increased potential impact on public health and safety. The fee
will only impact four to six new facilities.
Item 6 increases examination fees to allow the Bureau of
Radiological Health to recover the cost of administering the
examination.
Item 7 ties certification fees to Chapter 42 only.
Items 8, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 27, 28, 29, 30,
31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 51, 52, 53, 58, 59, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,
88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 94, 95, 96, 97, 101, and 102 are amended or adopted because
of an agreement with the NRC that requires that the Bureau adopt certain
language.
Item 10 requires a permanent location with a
non–wireless telephone for persons in order to obtain a registration or
license. The term “non–wireless” is from federal language.
This will allow the department to distinguish between in–state and
out–of–state businesses in order to determine regular versus
reciprocity fees.
Item 11 changes the registration of facilities that are
required to register with the agency from personnel dosimetry services to
processor services. Personnel dosimetry services are already regulated by the
federal government but processor services are not. Many of the problems with
poor quality X–ray films are the result of processors.
Items 12 and 20 change the number of days to match other
references allowing three working days.
Item 13 corrects references and deletes a procedure that has
not been used for several years.
Items 26, 41, 54, 55, and 98 correct language or
references.
Items 42 and 43 have portions stricken because the
manufacturers provide the information required.
Items 44 and 46 are for clarification.
Item 45 places a portion of the law into the rules to allow
easier enforcement.
Items 48, 49, 60, 61, 62, and 76 revise language to match what
is accepted nationally and published by the Conference of Radiation Control
Program Directors, Inc. (CRCPD) and on which the Bureau’s X–ray
compliance program is based.
Items 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, and 74 are adopted or
amended because of an agreement with the FDA that requires the Department to
adopt certain language.
Item 77 adds grounds for discipline to the operator
certification rules when an operator performs exposures that the operator is not
trained or authorized to perform. This is important in preventing unnecessary
patient exposure and misdiagnosis.
Item 78 corrects the name of the national accrediting
body.
In Item 99, a subrule is rescinded because the information
required is included on the application form.
Item 104 adds language that was omitted when the rules were
amended in 1998; it is important that the warnings are read by the customer
annually in order to remind the customer about the possible hazards of
tanning.
These amendments have been reviewed based on the principles
set forth in Executive Order Number 9. Many changes could not be made because
of the federal compatibility requests.
These rules are subject to waiver pursuant to the
Department’s exemption provision contained at
641-38.3(136C). For this reason, the Department has
not provided a specific provision for waiver of these particular
rules.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on January 26, 2000, as ARC 9629A.
A public hearing was held on February 29, 2000, at 8:30 a.m.,
Conference Room, Fifth Floor South, Side 1, Lucas State Office Building, Des
Moines, Iowa 50319. There were no persons in attendance. Six sets of written
comments were received, reviewed, considered and incorporated as appropriate.
The changes made from the Notice of Intended Action are listed below:
In Item 3, the words “routine or accidental releases
of” were added to the third sentence in the definition of “residual
radioactivity” because of an NRC compatibility request.
In Item 42, the first sentence of
41.1(3)“f”(1)“2” was stricken based on public comment
that time–temperatures in the current rule were not representative of
current manufacturer recommendations.
In Item 46, the catchwords of 41.1(6) were changed to indicate
that veterinary is excluded. This change was based on comments from the State
Veterinarian’s Office.
In Item 57, the words “or its intensity profile”
were added to the definition of “filter” as suggested by public
comment.
In Item 65, the FDA requested that definitions be added that
were identical to the wording in the federal code.
In Item 66, paragraph 41.6(2)“a” was amended by
adding catchwords and subparagraph (2). In 41.6(2)“b”(8), the
phrase “authorization process” was changed to “accreditation
process” because the two processes are different. These changes are to
match wording from original federal language.
In Item 68, the words “general radiographer” were
deleted and “radiologic technologist” inserted. In Items 67, 68,
70, and 72, the word “supplier” was deleted and
“facility” inserted. In Items 66 and 70, the words “radiation
physicist” were changed to “medical physicist.” This was an
FDA request for uniformity.
In Item 68, the FDA requested that the previous wording in
existing subrule 41.6(3) be rescinded and wording identical to that in the
federal code be adopted in new subrule 41.6(3).
In Item 69, 41.6(4)“b”(7) was renumbered as (8)
and the wording was changed to clarify that a distinct section is required. The
other subparagraphs were reorganized for ease in reading. The phrase “a
timely manner” was changed to designate a more specific time
frame.
In Item 72, on request from the FDA, wording in
41.6(5)“k”(1), introductory paragraph, was changed from
“examinations are performed” to “clinical films are
processed.” In 41.6(5)“k”(1)“1,” the phrase
“or minus” was deleted. In
41.6(5)“k”(4)“3,” the phrase “47 pounds (209
newtons)” was changed to “45 pounds (200 newtons).” In
41.6(5)“k”(5)“7,” the first bulleted paragraph was
amended and the second bulleted paragraph was not adopted. In
41.6(5)“k”(8)“1,” another reference was added at the end
of the paragraph. These changes were made to correct errors from original
federal language. Subparagraph 41.6(5)“k”(7), mobile units, was not
adopted. Subsequent subparagraphs were renumbered.
In Item 73, catchwords were added to paragraphs
“a” to “t” in subrule 41.6(6) for ease in reading. In
41.6(6)“l”(5), the last sentence was deleted to match federal
language.
In Item 74, Appendix I has been rescinded. References are
included in the body of the rules and, therefore, this appendix is not
needed.
In Item 93, the symbol
“©” after “8.9.2” was
corrected to read “(c)” because of an NRC compatibility
request.
These amendments will become effective May 10, 2000.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
136C.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend the title of
641-Chapter 38 as
follows:
CHAPTER 38
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR RADIATION MACHINES
AND RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 38.1(2) as
follows:
38.1(2) All references to Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of July 1, 1999
May 10, 2000.
ITEM 3. Amend rule
641—38.2(136C) as follows:
Amend the following definitions:
“Background radiation” means radiation from cosmic
sources,; naturally occurring radioactive materials,
including radon, (except as a decay product of source or
special nuclear material,); and
including global fallout as it exists in the environment from
the testing of nuclear explosive devices or from past nuclear accidents such
as Chernobyl that contribute to background radiation and are not under the
control of the licensee. “Background radiation” does not
include sources of radiation from radioactive materials regulated by the
agency.
“Beam monitoring system” means a system designed
and installed in the radiation head to detect and measure the radiation
present in the useful beam.
“High radiation area” means an area, accessible to
individuals, in which radiation levels from radiation sources external to the
body could result in an individual’s receiving a dose equivalent in
excess of 1 mSv (0.1 rem) in 1 hour at 30 centimeters from any source of
radiation or 30 centimeters from any surface that the radiation
penetrates.
“Interlock” means a device arranged or
connected such that the occurrence of an event or condition is required before a
second event or condition can occur or continue to occur preventing
the start or continued operation of equipment unless certain predetermined
conditions prevail.
“Irradiation” means the exposure of a living
being or matter to ionizing radiation.
“Misadministration” means the administration
of:
1. to 3. No change.
4. Radiation doses received from teletherapy, linear
accelerator therapy, deep X–ray machine therapy or superficial therapy;
involving the wrong patient or human research subject, wrong mode of treatment
or wrong treatment site;
When the treatment consists of three or fewer fractions
or and the calculated total administered dose differs
from the total prescribed dose by more than 10 percent of the total prescribed
dose;
When the calculated weekly administered dose is 30 percent
greater than the weekly prescribed dose; or
When the calculated total administered dose differs from the
total prescribed dose by more than 20 percent of the total prescribed
dose.
5. and 6. No change.
“Occupational dose” means the dose received by an
individual in the course of employment in which the individual’s assigned
duties involve exposure to radiation from licensed or unlicensed and registered
or unregistered sources of radiation, whether in the possession of the licensee,
registrant, or other person. Occupational dose does not include dose received
from background radiation, as a patient from medical practices,
from any medical administration the individual has received, from exposure to
individuals administered sources of radiation and released in accordance with
41.2(27), from voluntary participation in medical research programs, or as a
member of the public.
“Public dose” means the dose received by a member
of the public from exposure to sources of radiation possessed by a licensee,
registrant, or other person, or to any other source of radiation under the
control of a licensee, registrant, or other person. It does not include
occupational dose or doses received from background radiation, as a
patient from medical practices, from any medical administration the
individual has received, from exposure to individuals administered sources of
radiation and released in accordance with 41.2(27) or from voluntary
participation in medical research programs.
Adopt the following new definitions in
alphabetical order:
“Barrier” (see “Protective
barrier”).
“Beam axis” means the axis of rotation of the
beam–limiting device.
“Beam–limiting device” means a field
defining collimator, integral to the system, which provides a means to restrict
the dimensions of the X–ray field or useful beam.
“Bone densitometry unit” means a medical device
which uses electronically produced ionizing radiation to determine the density
of bone structures of human patients.
“Critical group” means the group of individuals
reasonably expected to receive the greatest exposure to residual radioactivity
for any applicable set of circumstances.
“Decommission” means to remove a facility or site
safely from service and reduce residual radioactivity to a level that
permits:
1. Release of the property for unrestricted use and
termination of the license; or
2. Release of the property under restricted conditions and
termination of the license.
“Detector” (see “Radiation
detector”).
“Distinguishable from background” means that the
detectable concentration of a radionuclide is statistically different from the
background concentration of that radionuclide in the vicinity of the site or, in
the case of structures, in similar materials using adequate measurement
technology, survey, and statistical techniques.
“Kilovolt (kV)(kilo electron volt (keV))” means
the energy equal to that acquired by a particle with one electron charge in
passing through a potential difference of 1000 volts in a vacuum.
“Lead equivalent” means the thickness of lead
affording the same attenuation, under specified conditions, as the material in
question.
“Leakage radiation” means radiation emanating from
the diagnostic or therapeutic source assembly except for:
1. The useful beam, and
2. Radiation produced when the exposure switch or timer is not
activated.
“Lens dose equivalent (LDE)” applies to the
external exposure of the lens of the eye and is taken as the dose equivalent at
a tissue depth of 0.3 centimeter (300 mg/cm2).
“Light field” means that area of the intersection
of the light beam from the beam–limiting device and one of the set of
planes parallel to and including the plane of the image receptor, whose
perimeter is the locus of points at which the illumination is one–fourth
of the maximum in the intersection.
“mA” means milliampere.
“Mammogram” means an image produced through
radiography of the breast.
“Mammography” means radiography of the
breast.
“Mammography unit” means an assemblage of
components for the production of X–rays for use during mammography,
including, at a minimum: an X–ray generator, an X–ray control, a
tube housing assembly, a beam–limiting device, and the supporting
structures for these components.
“Primary protective barrier” (see
“Protective barrier”).
“Protective barrier” means a barrier used to
reduce radiation exposure. The types of protective barriers are as
follows:
1. “Primary protective barrier” means the
material, excluding filters, placed in the useful beam, for protection purposes,
to reduce the radiation exposure.
2. “Secondary protective barrier” means a barrier
sufficient to attenuate the stray radiation to the required degree.
“Radiation detector” means a device which, in the
presence of radiation, provides a signal or other indication suitable for use in
measuring one or more quantities of incident radiation.
“Radiographic imaging system” means any system
whereby a permanent or semipermanent image is recorded on an image receptor by
the action of ionizing radiation.
“Residual radioactivity” means radioactivity in
structures, materials, soils, groundwater, and other media at a site resulting
from activities under the licensee’s control. This includes radioactivity
from all licensed and unlicensed sources used by the licensee, but excludes
background radiation. It also includes radioactive materials remaining at the
site as a result of routine or accidental releases of radioactive material at
the site and previous burials at the site, even if those burials were made in
accordance with the provisions of 641-Chapter 40 or
any previous state or federal licenses, rules or regulations.
“Secondary dose monitoring system” means a system
which will terminate irradiation in the event of failure of the primary dose
monitoring system.
“Secondary protective barrier” (see
“Protective barrier”).
“Shutter” means a device attached to the tube
housing assembly which can intercept the entire cross–sectional area of
the useful beam and which has a lead equivalency not less than that of the tube
housing assembly.
“Simulator (radiation therapy simulation system)”
means any X–ray system intended for localizing the volume to be exposed
during radiation therapy and reproducing the position and size of the
therapeutic irradiation field.
“SSD” means the distance between the source and
the skin entrance plane of the patient (see “Target–to–skin
distance (TSD)”).
“Stray radiation” means the sum of leakage and
scattered radiation.
“Target–to–skin distance (TSD)” means
the distance measured along the beam axis from the center of the front surface
of the X–ray target or electron scattering foil to the surface of the
irradiated object or patient.
“Termination of irradiation” means the stopping of
irradiation in a fashion which will not permit continuance of irradiation
without the resetting of operating conditions at the control panel.
“Tube housing assembly” means the tube housing
with tube installed. It includes high–voltage or filament transformers,
or both, and other appropriate elements when such are contained within the tube
housing.
“Very high radiation area” means an area,
accessible to individuals, in which radiation levels from radiation sources
external to the body could result in an individual’s receiving an absorbed
dose in excess of 500 rad (5 Gy) in 1 hour at1 meter from a source of radiation
or 1 meter from any surface that the radiation penetrates.
Rescind the following definition:
“Eye dose equivalent” means the external
dose equivalent to the lens of the eye at a tissue depth of 0.3 centimeter (300
mg/cm2).
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 38.3(1) as
follows:
38.3(1) General provision. The agency may, upon
application therefor or upon its own initiative, grant such exemptions or
exceptions from the requirements of these rules the rules in
641-Chapters 38 to 46 as it
determines are authorized by law and will not result in undue hazard to public
health and safety or property. Application for exemptionsor exceptions
should be made in accordance with
641-
Chapter 178.
ITEM 5. Amend subrule 38.8(1),
paragraph “a,” as follows:
a. Each registrant shall, at the time of registration and the
anniversary date thereafter, as long as the registrant owns the radiation
machine, remit to the agency a fee sufficient to defray the cost of registering
the equipment with the department. All fees shall be paid annually in the form
of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.
The fees to be paid shall be in the amount computed by the following
schedule:
ANNUAL FEE SCHEDULE
|
|
Type of X–ray machine
|
Fee per tube
|
Maximum fee
|
1.
|
Medical
|
$51
|
$1500
|
2.
|
Osteopathy
|
$51
|
$1500
|
3.
|
Chiropractic
|
$51
|
$1500
|
4.
|
Dentistry
|
$39
|
$1000
|
5.
|
Podiatry
|
$39
|
$1000
|
6.
|
Veterinary Medicine
|
$25
|
––
|
7.
|
(Industrial/ Nonmedical Use)
|
$50
|
––
|
8.
|
Food Sterilization
|
$80 $1000
|
––
|
9.
|
Accelerators
|
$100
|
––
|
10.
|
Electron Microscope
|
$20
|
––
|
11.
|
Bone Densitometry
|
$25
|
––
|
Fees for radiation machines not listed in the above schedule
shall not be less than $50 per unit/tube.
ITEM 6. Amend subrule 38.8(3),
paragraph “a,” as follows:
a. A nonrefundable fee of $100 $125
shall be submitted with each application for taking an industrial radiography
examination to become certified by the agency.
ITEM 7. Amend subrule 38.8(6),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
38.8(6) Certification fees. Diagnostic radiographers,
radiation therapists, and nuclear medicine technologists (as defined in
641-Chapter 42), other than
licensed practitioners of the healing arts, are required to pay fees sufficient
to defray the cost of administering 641—Chapter 42. Fees are as
follows:
ITEM 8. Adopt new rule
641—38.10(136C) as follows:
641—38.10(136C) Deliberate misconduct.
38.10(1) Any licensee, registrant, applicant for a
license or certificate of registration, employee of a licensee, registrant or
applicant; or any contractor (including a supplier or consultant),
subcontractor, employee of a contractor or subcontractor of any licensee or
registrant or applicant for a license or certificate of registration, who
knowingly provides to any licensee, applicant, registrant, contractor, or
subcontractor any components, equipment, materials, or other goods or services
that relate to a licensee’s, registrant’s or applicant’s
activities in this rule, may not:
a. Engage in deliberate misconduct that causes or would have
caused, if not detected, a licensee, registrant, or applicant to be in violation
of any rule, regulation, or order; or any term, condition, or limitation of any
license or registration issued by the agency; or
b. Deliberately submit to the agency, a licensee, registrant,
applicant, or a licensee’s, registrant’s, or applicant’s
contractor or subcontractor, information that the person submitting the
information knows to be incomplete or inaccurate in some respect material to the
agency.
38.10(2) A person who violates paragraph
38.10(1)“a” or “b” may be subject to enforcement action
in accordance with the procedures in 641—38.9(136C).
38.10(3) For the purposes of paragraph
38.10(1)“a,” deliberate misconduct by a person means an intentional
act or omission that the person knows:
a. Would cause a licensee, registrant, or applicant to be in
violation of any rule, regulation, or order; or any term, condition, or
limitation of any license issued by the agency; or
b. Constitutes a violation of a requirement, procedure,
instruction, contract, purchase order, or policy of a licensee, registrant,
applicant, contractor, or subcontractor.
ITEM 9. Amend subrule 39.1(3) as
follows:
39.1(3) All references to any Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of July 1,
1999 May 10, 2000.
ITEM 10. Amend subrule 39.3(2),
paragraph “a,” as follows:
a. Apply for registration of such facility with the agency
prior to the operation of a radiation machine facility. In order to register
equipment, the person must have a permanent office located in Iowa that has a
non–wireless telephone, employee and equipment, and storage for
records regarding the equipment and operator certification. Application for
registration shall be completed on forms furnished by the agency and shall
include the appropriate fee from 641—38.8(136C).
ITEM 11. Amend subrule 39.3(3),
paragraph “d,” as follows:
d. For the purpose of 39.3(3), services may include but shall
not be limited to:
(1) Installation and servicing of radiation machines and
associated radiation machine components;
(2) Calibration of radiation machines or radiation measurement
instruments or devices;
(3) Radiation protection or health physics consultations or
surveys; and
(4) Personnel dosimetry services.
Processor or processor servicing, or both.
ITEM 12. Amend subrule 39.3(10),
paragraph “a,” introductory paragraph, as follows:
a. Whenever any radiation machine is to be brought into the
state, for any temporary use, the person proposing to bring such machine into
the state shall give written notice to the agency at least two
three working days before such machine is to be used in the state. The
notice shall include:
ITEM 13. Amend subrule 39.4(24) as
follows:
39.4(24) Filing application for specific
licenses.
a. to d. No change.
e. In the application, the applicant may incorporate
by reference information contained in previous applications, statements, or
reports filed with the agency, provided such references are clear and
specific.
f e. Applications and documents
submitted to the agency may be made available for public inspection except that
the agency may withhold any document or part thereof from public inspection if
disclosure of its content is not required in the public interest and would
adversely affect the interest of a person concerned.
g f. (1) Each application to possess
radioactive materials in unsealed form, on foils or plated sources, or sealed in
glass in excess of the quantities in Appendix G of this chapter, must contain
either:
1. and 2. No change.
(2) One or more of the following factors may be used to
support an evaluation submitted under
39.4(24)“g”(1)“1”
39.4(24)“f”(1)“1” of this subrule:
1. to 7. No change.
(3) An emergency plan for responding to a release of
radioactive material submitted under
39.4(24)“g”(1)“2”
39.4(24)“f”(1)“2” must include the following
information:
1. to 13. No change.
(4) No change.
ITEM 14. Amend subrule 39.4(26),
paragraph “e,” as follows:
e. Each decommissioning funding plan must contain a cost
estimate for decommissioning and a description of the method of assuring funds
for decommissioning from 39.4(26)“f,” including means of adjusting
cost estimates and associated funding levels periodically over the life of the
facility. The decommissioning funding plan must also contain a certification
by the licensee that financial assurance for decommissioning has been provided
in the amount of the cost estimate and a signed original of the financial
instrument obtained to satisfy the requirements of
39.4(26)“f.”
ITEM 15. Amend subparagraph
39.4(26)“f”(2), introductory paragraph, as follows:
(2) A surety method, insurance, or other guarantee method.
These methods guarantee that decommissioning costs will be paid should the
licensee default. A surety method may be in the form of a surety bond, letter
of credit, or line of credit. A parent company guarantee of funds for
decommissioning costs based on a financial test may be used if the guarantee and
test are as contained in Appendix F of this chapter. A parent company guarantee
may not be used in combination with other financial methods to satisfy the
requirements of this subrule. For commercial corporations that issue bonds,
a guarantee of funds by the applicant or licensee for decommissioning costs
based on a financial test may be used if the guarantee and test are as contained
in Appendix H of this chapter. For commercial companies that do not issue
bonds, a guarantee of funds by the applicant or licensee for decommissioning
costs may be used if the guarantee and test are as contained in Appendix I of
this chapter. For nonprofit entities, such as colleges, universities, and
nonprofit hospitals, a guarantee of funds by the applicant or licensee may be
used if the guarantee and test are as contained in Appendix J of this chapter.
A guarantee by the applicant or licensee may not be used in combination with any
other financial methods used to satisfy the requirements of paragraph
39.4(26)“f” or in any situation where the applicant or licensee has
a parent company holding majority control of the voting stock of the company.
Any surety method or insurance used to provide financial assurance for
decommissioning must contain the following conditions:
ITEM 16. Amend subrule 39.4(26),
paragraph “f,” by adopting new subparagraph
(5) as follows:
(5) When a governmental entity assumes custody and ownership
of a site, an arrangement that is deemed acceptable by such governmental
entity.
ITEM 17. Rescind subrule
39.4(27), paragraph “e,” and adopt the
following new paragraph in lieu thereof:
e. Use of sealed sources in industrial radiography. In
addition to the requirements set forth in 39.4(25), a specific license for use
of sealed sources in industrial radiography will be issued if the application
contains:
(1) A schedule or description of the program for training
radiographic personnel which specifies:
1. Initial training,
2. Periodic training,
3. On–the–job training, and
4. Methods to be used by the licensee to determine the
knowledge, understanding, and ability of radiographic personnel to comply with
agency rules, licensing requirements, and the operating and emergency procedures
of the applicant;
(2) Written operating and emergency procedures, including all
items listed in Appendix D of 641—Chapter 45;
(3) A description of the internal inspection system or other
management control to ensure that radiographic personnel follow license
provisions, rules of the agency, and the applicant’s operating and
emergency procedures;
(4) A list of permanent radiographic installations and
descriptions of permanent storage and use locations. Radioactive material shall
not be stored at a permanent storage location or used at a permanent use
location unless such storage or use location is specifically authorized by the
license. A storage or use location is permanent if radioactive material is
stored at the location for more than 90 days and any of the following applies to
the location:
1. Non–wireless telephone service is established by the
licensee;
2. Industrial radiographic services are advertised for or from
the location;
3. Industrial radiographic operations are conducted at other
sites due to arrangements made from the location;
(5) A description of the organization of the industrial
radiographic program, including delegations of authority and responsibility for
operation of the radiation safety program;
(6) A description of the program for inspection and
maintenance of radiographic exposure devices and transport and storage
containers (including applicable items in 641-subrule
45.1(8) and 641-Chapter 45, Appendix A);
and
(7) If a license application includes underwater radiography,
a description of:
1. Radiation safety procedures and radiographer
responsibilities unique to the performance of underwater radiography;
2. Radiographic equipment and radiation safety equipment
unique to underwater radiography; and
3. Methods for gas–tight encapsulation of
equipment;
(8) If a license application includes offshore platform or
lay–barge radiography, a description of:
1. Transport procedures for radioactive material to be used in
industrial radiographic operations;
2. Storage facilities for radioactive material; and
3. Methods for restricting access to radiation
areas.
ITEM 18. Amend subparagraph
39.4(33)“j”(2), intro–ductory paragraph, as
follows:
(2) Conduct a radiation survey of the premises where the
licensed activities were carried out and submit a report of the results of this
survey unless the licensee demonstrates that the premises are suitable
for release in some other mannerin some other manner that the
premises are suitable for release in accordance with the criteria for
decommissioning in 641—40.28(136C) through 641—40.31(136C). The
licen–see shall, as appropriate:
ITEM 19. Amend subparagraph
39.4(33)“k”(3) as follows:
(3) A radiation survey has been performed which demonstrates
that the premises are suitable for release in accordance with state of
Iowa requirements; or other information submitted by the licensee is
sufficient to demonstrate that the premises are suitable for release in
accordance with state of Iowa requirements the criteria for
decommissioning in 641— 40.28(136C) through
641—40.31(136C).
ITEM 20. Amend subparagraph
39.4(90)“a”(3) as follows:
(3) The out–of–state licensee shall notify the
agency in writing at least three working days prior to engaging in
activities in the state. Such notification shall indicate the location, period,
and type of proposed possession and use within the state, and shall be
accompanied by a copy of the pertinent licensing document initially. If, for a
specific case, the three–day period would impose an undue hardship on the
out–of–state licensee, the licensee may, upon application to the
agency, obtain permission to proceed sooner. The agency may waive the
requirement for filing additional written notifications during the remainder of
the one–year reciprocity period following the receipt of the initial
notification from a person engaging in activities under the general license
provided by 39.4(90)“a.”
ITEM 21. Rescind rule
641—39.5(136C) and adopt the following new rule in lieu
thereof:
641—39.5(136C) Transportation of radioactive
material. All persons who transport radioactive material or deliver
radioactive material to a carrier for transport must comply with the provision
contained in 10 CFR Part 71 as it applies to the state of Iowa.
ITEM 22. Rescind and reserve
641—Chapter 39, Appendix E.
ITEM 23. Amend 641—Chapter
39 by adopting the following new Appendices H, I and
J:
Appendix H
Criteria Relating to Use of Financial Tests
and Self– Guarantees for Providing Reasonable Assurance
of Funds for Decommissioning
I. Introduction
An applicant or licensee may provide reasonable assurance of
the availability of funds for decommissioning based on furnishing its own
guarantee that funds will be available for decommissioning costs and on a
demonstration that the company passes the financial test of Section II of this
appendix. The terms of the self–guarantee are in Section III of this
appendix. This appendix establishes criteria for passing the financial test for
the self–guarantee and establishes the terms for a
self–guarantee.
II. Financial Test
A. To pass the financial test, a company must meet all of the
following criteria:
1. Tangible net worth at least ten times the total current
decommissioning cost estimate for the total of all facilities or parts thereof
(or the current amount required if certification is used).
2. Assets located in the United States amounting to at least
90 percent of total assets or at least ten times the total current
decommissioning cost estimate for the total of all facilities or parts thereof
(or the current amount required if certification is used).
3. A current rating for its most recent bond issuance of AAA,
AA, or A as issued by Standard and Poor’s (S&P) or Aaa, Aa, or A as
issued by Moody’s.
B. To pass the financial test, a company must meet all of the
following additional requirements:
1. The company must have at least one class of equity
securities registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
2. The company’s independent certified public accountant
must have compared the data used by the company in the financial test, which is
derived from the independently audited, year–end financial statements for
the latest fiscal year, with the amounts in such financial statement. In
connection with that procedure, the licensee shall inform the agency within 90
days of any matters coming to the attention of the auditor that cause the
auditor to believe that the data specified in the financial test should be
adjusted and that the company no longer passes the test.
3. After the initial financial test, the company must repeat
passage of the test within 90 days after the close of each succeeding fiscal
year.
C. If the licensee no longer meets the requirements of Section
II.A. of this appendix, the licensee must send immediate notice to the agency of
its intent to establish alternate financial assurance as specified in these
rules within 120 days of such notice.
III. Company Self–Guarantee
The terms of a self–guarantee which an applicant or
licensee furnishes must provide that:
A. The guarantee will remain in force unless the licensee
sends notice of cancellation by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the
agency. Cancellation may not occur, however, during the 120 days beginning on
the date of receipt of the notice of cancellation by the agency, as evidenced by
the return receipt.
B. The licensee shall provide alternative financial assurance
as specified in these rules within 90 days following receipt by the agency of a
notice of cancellation of the guarantee.
C. The guarantee and financial test provisions must remain in
effect until the agency has terminated the license or until another financial
assurance method acceptable to the agency has been put in effect by the
licensee.
D. The licensee will promptly forward to the agency and the
licensee’s independent auditor all reports covering the latest fiscal year
filed by the licensee with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to
the requirements of Section 13 of the Securities and Exchange Act of
1934.
E. If, at any time, the licensee’s most recent bond
issuance ceases to be rated in any category of “A” or above by
either Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s, the licensee will provide
notice in writing of such fact to the agency within 20 days after publication of
the change by the rating service. If the licensee’s most recent bond
issuance ceases to be rated in any category of “A” or above by both
Standard and Poor’s and Moody’s, the licensee no longer meets the
requirements of Section II.A. of this appendix.
F. The applicant or licensee must provide to the agency a
written guarantee (a written commitment by a corporate officer) which states
that the licensee will fund and carry out the required decommissioning
activities or, upon issuance of an order by the agency, the licensee will set up
and fund a trust in the amount of the current cost estimates for
decommissioning.
Appendix I
Criteria Relating to Use of Financial Tests
and Self–Guarantees for Providing Reasonable Assurance of Funds for
Decommissioning by Commercial Companies That Have No Outstanding Rated
Bonds
I. Introduction
An applicant or licensee may provide reasonable assurance of
the availability of funds for decommissioning based on furnishing its own
guarantee that funds will be available for decommissioning costs and on a
demonstration that the company passes the financial test of Section II of this
appendix. The terms of the self–guarantee are in Section III of this
appendix. This appendix establishes criteria for passing the financial test for
the self–guarantee and establishes the terms for a
self–guarantee.
II. Financial Test
A. To pass the financial test, a company must meet the
following criteria:
1. Tangible net worth greater than $10 million, or at least
ten times the total current decommissioning cost estimate (or the current amount
required if certification is used), whichever is greater, for all
decommissioning activities for which the company is responsible as
self–guaranteeing licensee and as parent–guarantor.
2. Assets located in the United States amounting to at least
90 percent of total assets or at least ten times the total current
decommissioning cost estimate (or the current amount required if certification
is used) for all decommissioning activities for which the company is responsible
as self–guaranteeing licensee and as parent–guarantor.
3. A ratio of cash flow divided by total liabilities greater
than 0.15 and a ratio of total liabilities divided by net worth less than
1.5.
B. In addition, to pass the financial test, a company must
meet all of the following requirements:
1. The company’s independent certified public accountant
must have compared the data used by the company in the financial test, which is
required to be derived from the independently audited year–end financial
statement based on United States generally accepted accounting practices for the
latest fiscal year, with the amounts in such financial statement. In connection
with that procedure, the licensee shall inform the agency within 90 days of any
matters that may cause the auditor to believe that the data specified in
thefinancial test should be adjusted and that the company no longer passes the
test.
2. After the initial financial test, the company must repeat
passage of the test within 90 days after the close of each succeeding fiscal
year.
3. If the licensee no longer meets the requirements of Section
II.A. of this appendix, the licensee must send notice to the agency of intent to
establish alternative financial assurance as specified in these rules. The
notice must be sent by certified mail, return receipt requested, within 90 days
after the end of the fiscal year for which the year–end financial data
show that the licensee no longer meets the financial test requirements. The
licensee must provide alternative financial assurance within 120 days after the
end of such fiscal year.
III. Company Self–Guarantee
The terms of a self–guarantee which an applicant or
licensee furnishes must provide that:
A. The guarantee shall remain in force unless the
licen–see sends notice of cancellation by certified mail, return receipt
requested, to the agency. Cancellation may not occur until an alternative
financial assurance mechanism is in place.
B. The licensee shall provide alternative financial assurance
as specified in the regulations within 90 days following receipt by the agency
of a notice of cancellation of the guarantee.
C. The guarantee and financial test provisions must remain in
effect until the agency has terminated the license or until another financial
assurance method acceptable to the agency has been put in effect by the
licensee.
D. The applicant or licensee must provide to the agency a
written guarantee (a written commitment by a corporate officer) which states
that the licensee will fund and carry out the required decommissioning
activities or, upon issuance of an order by the agency, the licensee will set up
and fund a trust in the amount of the current cost estimates for
decommissioning.
Appendix J
Criteria Relating to Use of Financial Tests
and Self–Guarantees for Providing Reasonable Assurance of Funds for
Decommissioning by Nonprofit Colleges, Universities, and Hospitals
I. Introduction
An applicant or licensee may provide reasonable assurance of
the availability of funds for decommissioning based on furnishing its own
guarantee that funds will be available for decommissioning costs and on a
demonstration that the applicant or licensee passes the financial test of
Section II of this appendix. The terms of the self–guarantee are in
Section III of this appendix. This appendix establishes criteria for passing
the financial test for the self–guarantee and establishes the terms for a
self–guarantee.
II. Financial Test
A. For colleges and universities to pass the financial test, a
college or university must meet either the criteria in Section II.A.1. or the
criteria in Section II.A.2. of this appendix.
1. For applicants or licensees that issue bonds, a current
rating for its most recent uninsured, uncollateralized, and unencumbered bond
issuance of AAA, AA, or A as issued by Standard and Poor’s (S&P) or
Aaa, Aa, or A as issued by Moody’s.
2. For applicants or licensees that do not issue bonds,
unrestricted endowment consisting of assets located in the United States of at
least $50 million, or at least 30 times the total current decommissioning cost
estimate (or the current amount required if certification is used), whichever is
greater, for all decommissioning activities for which the college or university
is responsible as a self–guaranteeing licensee.
B. For hospitals to pass the financial test, a hospital must
meet either the criteria in Section II.B.1. or the criteria in Section II.B.2.
of this appendix:
1. For applicants or licensees that issue bonds, a current
rating for its most recent uninsured, uncollateralized, and unencumbered bond
issuance of AAA, AA, or A as issued by Standard and Poor’s (S&P) or
Aaa, Aa, or A as issued by Moody’s.
2. For applicants or licensees that do not issue bonds, all
the following tests must be met:
(a) (Total revenues less total expenditures) divided by total
revenues must be equal to or greater than 0.04.
(b) Long–term debt divided by net fixed assets must be
less than or equal to 0.67.
(c) (Current assets and depreciation fund) divided by current
liabilities must be greater than or equal to 2.55.
(d) Operating revenues must be at least 100 times the total
current decommissioning cost estimate (or the current amount required if
certification is used) for all decommissioning activities for which the hospital
is responsible as a self–guaranteeing licensee.
C. In addition, to pass the financial test, a licensee must
meet all the following requirements:
1. The licensee’s independent certified public
accountant must have compared the data used by the licensee in the financial
test, which is required to be derived from the independently audited
year–end financial statements, based on United States generally accepted
accounting practices, for the latest fiscal year, with the amounts in such
financial statement. In connection with that procedure, the licensee shall
inform this agency within 90 days of any matters coming to the attention of the
auditor that cause the auditor to believe that the data specified in the
financial test should be adjusted and that the licensee no longer passes the
test.
2. After the initial financial test, the licensee must repeat
passage of the test within 90 days after the close of each succeeding fiscal
year.
3. If the licensee no longer meets the requirements of Section
I of this appendix, the licensee must send notice to this agency of its intent
to establish alternative financial assurance as specified in these rules. The
notice must be sent by certified mail, return receipt requested, within 90 days
after the end of the fiscal year for which the year–end financial data
show that the licensee no longer meets the financial test requirements. The
licensee must provide alternate financial assurance within 120 days after the
end of such fiscal year.
III. Self–Guarantee
The terms of a self–guarantee which an applicant or
licensee furnishes must provide that:
A. The guarantee shall remain in force unless the
licen–see sends notice of cancellation by certified mail, return receipt
requested, to the agency. Cancellation may not occur until an alternative
financial assurance mechanism is in place.
B. The licensee shall provide alternative financial assurance
as specified in these rules within 90 days following receipt by the agency of a
notice of cancellation of the guarantee.
C. The guarantee and financial test provisions must remain in
effect until the agency has terminated the license or until another financial
assurance method acceptable to the agency has been put in effect by the
licensee.
D. The applicant or licensee must provide to the agency a
written guarantee (a written commitment by a corporate officer or officer of the
institution) which states that the licensee will fund and carry out the required
decommissioning activities or, upon issuance of an order by the agency, the
licensee will set up and fund a trust in the amount of the current cost
estimates for decommissioning.
E. If, at any time, the licensee’s most recent bond
issuance ceases to be rated in any category of “A” or above by
either Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s, the licensee shall provide
notice in writing of such fact to the agency within 20 days after publication of
the change by the rating service.
ITEM 24. Amend subrule 40.1(5) as
follows:
40.1(5) All references to Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR) in this chapter are those in effect on or before July 1,
1999 May 10, 2000.
ITEM 25. Amend subrule 40.2(2),
definitions of “declared pregnant woman” and “very high
radiation area,” as follows:
“Declared pregnant woman” means a woman who has
voluntarily informed her employer, in writing, of her pregnancy and the
estimated date of conception. The declaration remains in effect until the
declared pregnant woman withdraws the declaration in writing or is no longer
pregnant.
“Very high radiation area” means an area,
accessible to individuals, in which radiation levels could result in an
individual receiving an absorbed dose in excess of 500 rad (5 Gy) in 1 hour at 1
meter from a source of radiation or from any surface that the radiation
penetrates.
ITEM 26. Amend subrule 40.10(2) as
follows:
40.10(2) The licensee or registrant shall use, to the
extent practicable practical, procedures and engineering
controls based upon sound radiation protection principles to achieve
occupational doses and public doses that are as low as is reasonably achievable
(ALARA).
ITEM 27. Amend subparagraph
40.15(1)“b”(1) as follows:
(1) An eye A lens dose equivalent of
15 rem (0.15 Sv), and
ITEM 28. Amend subrule 40.15(3) as
follows:
40.15(3) The assigned deep dose equivalent and shallow
dose equivalent shall be for the portion of the body receiving the highest
exposure determined as follows:
The deep dose equivalent, eye lens
dose equivalent and shallow dose equivalent may be assessed from surveys or
other radiation measurements for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with
the occupational dose limits, if the individual monitoring device was not in the
region of highest potential exposure, or the results of individual monitoring
are unavailable.
ITEM 29. Amend subrule 40.20(1) as
follows:
40.20(1) The licensee or registrant authorizes a
planned special exposure only in an exceptional situation when alternatives that
might avoid the higher exposure dose estimated to result
from the planned special exposure are unavailable or impractical.
ITEM 30. Amend rule 641—40.22(136C)
as follows:
641—40.22(136C) Dose equivalent to an
embryo/fetus.
40.22(1) The licensee or registrant shall ensure that
the dose equivalent to an embryo/fetus during the entire pregnancy, due
to occupational exposure of a declared pregnant woman, does not exceed 0.5 rem
(5 mSv). See 40.86(136C) for record–keeping requirements.
40.22(2) No change.
40.22(3) The dose equivalent to an embryo/fetus
shall be taken as the sum of:
a. The deep dose equivalent to the declared pregnant woman;
and
b. The dose equivalent to the embryo/fetus from
radionuclides in the embryo/fetus and radionuclides in the declared pregnant
woman.
40.22(4) If by the time the woman declares pregnancy
to the licensee or registrant, the dose equivalent to the embryo/fetus
has exceeded 0.45 rem (4.5 mSv), the licensee or registrant shall be deemed to
be in compliance with 40.22(1) if the additional dose equivalent to the
embryo/fetus does not exceed 0.05 rem (0.5 mSv) during the remainder of the
pregnancy.
ITEM 31. Amend subparagraph
40.36(1)“b”(1) as follows:
(1) Radiation The magnitude and extent of
radiation levels; and
ITEM 32. Amend subrule 40.62(2) as
follows:
40.62(2) Rooms or other areas in hospitals that are
occupied by patients are not required to be posted with caution signs pursuant
to 40.61(136C) provided that the patient could be released from
confinement licensee control pursuant to
641—41.27(136C) 641—subrule
41.2(27).
ITEM 33. Amend rule 641—40.62(136C)
by adopting new subrule 40.62(5) as
follows:
40.62(5) Rooms in hospitals or clinics that are used
for teletherapy are exempt from the requirement to post caution signs under
641-40.61(136C) if:
a. Access to the room is controlled pursuant to
641— subrule 41.2(53); and
b. Personnel in attendance take necessary precautions to
prevent an inadvertent exposure of workers, other patients, and members of the
public to radiation in excess of the limits established in this
chapter.
ITEM 34. Rescind rule
641—40.75(136C) and adopt the following new rule in lieu
thereof:
641—40.75(136C) Transfer for disposal and
manifests.
40.75(1) Any licensee shipping radioactive waste
intended for ultimate disposal at a licensed land disposal facility must
document the information required on the Uniform Low–Level Radioactive
Waste Manifest and transfer this recorded manifest information to the intended
consignee in accordance with Appendix D of this chapter.
40.75(2) Each shipment manifest must include a
certification by the waste generator as specified in Section II of Appendix D of
this chapter.
40.75(3) Each person involved in the transfer for
disposal and disposal of waste, including the waste generator, waste collector,
waste processor, and disposal facility operator, shall comply with the
requirements specified in Section III of Appendix D of this chapter.
ITEM 35. Amend rule
641—40.80(136C) as follows:
641—40.80(136C) General provisions.
40.80(1) Each licensee or registrant shall use the
special units curie, rad, rem and roentgen, counts per minute (cpm),
disintegrations per minute (dpm), or the SI units becquerel, gray, sievert and
coulomb per kilogram, including multiples and subdivisions, and shall clearly
indicate the units of all quantities on records required by this
chapter.
40.80(2) The licensee or registrant shall make a clear
distinction among the quantities entered on the records required by this
chapter, such as, total effective dose equivalent, total organ dose equivalent,
shallow dose equivalent, eye lens dose equivalent, deep
dose equivalent, or committed effective dose equivalent.
40.80(3) In the records required by this
chapter, the licensee may record quantities in SI units in parentheses following
each of the units specified in 40.80(1). However, all quantities must be
recorded as stated in 40.80(1).
40.80(4) Notwithstanding the requirements of
40.80(1), when recording information on shipment manifests, as required in
641-40.75(136C), information must be
recorded in the International System of Units (SI) or in SI and units as
specified in 40.80(1).
ITEM 36. Rescind
641-Chapter 40, Appendix D, and adopt
new Appendix D as follows:
Appendix D
Requirements for Transfers of
Low–Level
Radioactive Waste Intended for Disposal at
Licensed Land
Disposal Facilities and Manifests
As used in this appendix, the following definitions
apply:
“Chelating agent” means amine polycarboxylic acids
(e.g., EDTA, DTPA), hydroxy–carboxylic acids, and polycarboxylic acids
(e.g., citric acid, carbolic acid, and glucinic acid).
“Chemical description” means a description of the
principal chemical characteristics of a low–level radioactive
waste.
“Computer–readable medium” means that the
regulatory agency’s computer can transfer the information from the medium
into its memory.
“Consignee” means the designated receiver of the
shipment of low–level radioactive waste.
“Decontamination facility” means a facility
operating under an Agreement State or Nuclear Regulatory Commission license
whose principal purpose is decontamination of equipment or materials to
accomplish recycle, reuse, or other waste management objectives and, for
purposes of this appendix, is not considered to be a consignee for LLW
shipments.
“Disposal container” means a container principally
used to confine low–level radioactive waste during disposal operations at
a land disposal facility (also see “high integrity container”).
Note that for some shipments, the disposal container may be the transport
package.
“EPA identification number” means the number
received by a transporter following application to the administrator of EPA as
required by 40 CFR Part 263.
“Forms 540, 540A, 541, 541A, 542, and 542A” are
official forms referenced in this appendix. Licensees need not use originals of
these forms as long as any substitute forms are equivalent to the original
documentation in respect to content, clarity, size, and location of information.
Upon agreement between the shipper and consignee, Forms 541 (and 541A) and Forms
542 (and 542A) may be completed, transmitted, and stored in electronic media.
The electronic media must have the capability for producing legible, accurate,
and complete records in the format of the uniform manifest.
“Generator” means a licensee operating
under an Agreement State or Nuclear Regulatory Commission license who (1) is a
waste generator as defined in this rule, or (2) is the licensee to whom waste
can be attributed within the context of the Low–Level Radioactive Waste
Policy Amendments Act of 1985 (e.g., waste generated as a result of
decontamination or recycle activities).
“High integrity container (HIC)” means a container
commonly designed to meet the structural stability requirements of 10 CFR 61.56,
and to meet United States Department of Transportation requirements for a Type A
package.
“Land disposal facility” means the land, buildings
and structures, and equipment which are intended to be used for the disposal of
radioactive wastes. For purposes of this appendix, a “geologic
repository” as defined in 10 CFR Part 60 is not considered a land disposal
facility.
“Package” means the assembly of components
necessary to ensure compliance with the packaging requirements of United States
Department of Transportation regulations, together with its radioactive
contents, as presented for transport.
“Physical description” means the items called for
on Form 541 to describe a low–level radioactive waste.
“Residual waste” means low–level radioactive
waste resulting from processing or decontamination activities that cannot be
easily separated into distinct batches attributable to specific waste
generators. This waste is attributable to the processor or decontamination
facility, as applicable.
“Shipper” means the licensed entity (i.e., the
waste generator, waste collector, or waste processor) who offers low–level
radioactive waste for transportation, typically consigning this type of waste to
a licensed waste collector, waste processor, or land disposal facility
operator.
“Shipping paper” means Form 540 and, if required,
Form 540A which includes the information required by United States Department of
Transportation in 49 CFR Part 172.
“Uniform Low–Level Radioactive Waste
Manifest” or “uniform manifest” means the combination of Forms
540, 541 and, if necessary, 542, and their respective continuation sheets as
needed, or equivalent.
“Waste collector” means an entity, operating under
an Agreement State or Nuclear Regulatory Commission license, whose principal
purpose is to collect and consolidate waste generated by others, and to transfer
this waste, without processing or repackaging the collected waste, to another
licensed waste collector, licensed waste processor, or licensed land disposal
facility.
“Waste description” means the physical, chemical
and radiological description of a low–level radioactive waste as called
for on Form 541.
“Waste generator” means an entity, operating under
an Agreement State or Nuclear Regulatory Commission license, who (1) possesses
any material or component that contains radioactivity or is radioactively
contaminated for which the licensee foresees no further use, and (2) transfers
this material or component to a licensed land disposal facility or to a licensed
waste collector or processor for handling or treatment prior to disposal. A
licensee performing pro–cessing or decontamination services may be a
“waste generator” if the transfer of low–level radioactive
waste from its facility is defined as “residual waste.”
“Waste processor” means an entity, operating under
an Agreement State or Nuclear Regulatory Commission license, whose principal
purpose is to process, repackage, or otherwise treat low–level radioactive
material or waste generated by others prior to eventual transfer of waste to a
licensed low–level radioactive waste land disposal facility.
“Waste type” means a waste within a disposal
container having a unique physical description (i.e., a specific waste
descriptor code or description; or a waste sorbed on or solidified in a
specifically defined media).
I. Manifest
A waste generator, collector, or processor who transports, or
offers for transportation, low–level radioactive waste intended for
ultimate disposal at a licensed low–level radioactive waste land disposal
facility must prepare a manifest reflecting information requested on applicable
Forms 540 (Uniform Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest (Shipping Paper))
and 541 (Uniform Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest (Container and Waste
Description)) and, if necessary, on an applicable Form 542 (Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest (Manifest Index and Regional Compact
Tabulation)). Forms 540 and 540A must be completed and must physically
accompany the pertinent low–level waste shipment. Upon agreement between
shipper and consignee, Forms 541 and 541A and 542 and 542A may be completed,
transmitted, and stored in electronic media with the capability for producing
legible, accurate, and complete records on the respective forms. Licensees are
not required by this agency to comply with the manifesting requirements of this
part when they ship:
(a) LLW for processing and expect its return (i.e., for
storage under their license) prior to disposal at a licensed land disposal
facility;
(b) LLW that is being returned to the licensee who is the
“waste generator” or “generator,” as defined in this
part; or
(c) Radioactively contaminated material to a “waste
processor” that becomes the processor’s “residual
waste.”
For guidance in completing these forms, refer to the
instructions that accompany the forms. Copies of manifests required by this
appendix may be legible carbon copies, photocopies, or computer printouts that
reproduce the data in the format of the uniform manifest.
Forms 540, 540A, 541, 541A, 542 and 542A, and the accompanying
instructions, in hard copy, may be obtained from the Information and Records
Management Branch, Office of Information Resources Management, U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555, telephone
(301)415–7232.
This appendix includes information requirements of the United
States Department of Transportation, as codified in 49 CFR Part 172.
Information on hazardous, medical, or other waste required to meet Environmental
Protection Agency regulations, as codified in 40 CFR Parts 259, 261, or
elsewhere, is not addressed in this section, and must be provided on the
required EPA forms. However, the required EPA forms must accompany the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest required by this chapter.
Information Requirements
A. General Information
The shipper of the radioactive waste shall provide the
following information on the uniform manifest:
1. The name, facility’s address, and telephone number of
the licensee shipping the waste;
2. An explicit declaration indicating whether the shipper is
acting as a waste generator, collector, processor, or a combination of these
identifiers for purposes of the manifested shipment; and
3. The name, address, and telephone number, or the name and
EPA identification number, for the carrier transporting the waste.
B. Shipment Information
The shipper of the radioactive waste shall provide the
following information regarding the waste shipment on the uniform
manifest:
1. The date of the waste shipment;
2. The total number of packages/disposal containers;
3. The total disposal volume and disposal weight in the
shipment;
4. The total radionuclide activity in the shipment;
5. The activity of each of the radionuclides, H–3,
C–14, Tc–99, and I–129 contained in the shipment;
and
6. The total masses of U–233, U–235, and plutonium
in special nuclear material, and the total mass of uranium and thorium in source
material.
C. Disposal Container and Waste Information
The shipper of the radioactive waste shall provide the
following information on the uniform manifest regarding the waste and each
disposal container of waste in the shipment:
1. An alphabetic or numeric identification that uniquely
identifies each disposal container in the shipment;
2. A physical description of the disposal container, including
the manufacturer and model of any high integrity container;
3. The volume displaced by the disposal container;
4. The gross weight of the disposal container, including the
waste;
5. For waste consigned to a disposal facility, the maximum
radiation level at the surface of each disposal container;
6. A physical and chemical description of the waste;
7. The total weight percentage of chelating agent for any
waste containing more than 0.1 percent chelating agent by weight, plus the
identity of the principal chelating agent;
8. The approximate volume of waste within a
container;
9. The sorbing or solidification media, if any, and the
identity of the solidification media vendor and brand name;
10. The identities and activities of individual radionuclides
contained in each container, the masses of U–233, U–235, and
plutonium in special nuclear material, and the masses of uranium and thorium in
source material. For discrete waste types (i.e., activated materials,
contaminated equipment, mechanical filters, sealed source/devices, and wastes in
solidification/stabilization media), the identities and activities of individual
radionuclides associated with or contained in these waste types within a
disposal container shall be reported;
11. The total radioactivity within each container;
and
12. For wastes consigned to a disposal facility, the
classification of the waste pursuant to 10 CFR 61.55. Waste not meeting the
structural stability requirements of 10 CFR 61.56(b) must be
identified.
D. Uncontainerized Waste Information
The shipper of the radioactive waste shall provide the
following information on the uniform manifest regarding a waste shipment
delivered without a disposal container:
1. The approximate volume and weight of the waste;
2. A physical and chemical description of the waste;
3. The total weight percentage of chelating agent if the
chelating agent exceeds 0.1 percent by weight, plus the identity of the
principal chelating agent;
4. For waste consigned to a disposal facility, the
classification of the waste pursuant to 10 CFR 61.55. Waste not meeting the
structural stability requirements of 10 CFR 61.56(b) must be
identified;
5. The identities and activities of individual radionuclides
contained in the waste, the masses of U–233, U–235, and plutonium in
special nuclear material, and the masses of uranium and thorium in source
material; and
6. For wastes consigned to a disposal facility, the maximum
radiation levels at the surface of the waste.
E. Multigenerator Disposal Container Information
This section applies to disposal containers enclosing mixtures
of waste originating from different generators. (Note: The origin of the LLW
resulting from a processor’s activities may be attributable to one or more
“generators” (including “waste generators”) as defined
in this appendix.) It also applies to mixtures of wastes shipped in an
uncontainerized form, for which portions of the mixture within the shipment
originate from different generators.
1. For homogeneous mixtures of waste, such as incinerator ash,
provide the waste description applicable to the mixture and the volume of the
waste attributed to each generator.
2. For heterogeneous mixtures of waste, such as the combined
products from a large compactor, identify each generator contributing waste to
the disposal container and, for discrete waste types (i.e., activated materials,
contaminated equipment, mechanical filters, sealed source/devices, and wastes in
solidification/stabilization media), the identities and activities of individual
radionuclides contained in these waste types within the disposal container. For
each generator, provide the following:
(a) The volume of waste within the disposal container;
(b) A physical and chemical description of the waste,
including the solidification agent, if any;
(c) The total weight percentage of chelating agents for any
disposal container containing more than 0.1 percent chelating agent by weight,
plus the identity of the principal chelating agent;
(d) The sorbing or solidification media, if any, and the
identity of the solidification media vendor and brand nameif the media is
claimed to meet stability requirements in10 CFR 61.56(b); and
(e) Radionuclide identities and activities contained in the
waste, the masses of U–233, U–235, and plutonium in special nuclear
material, and the masses of uranium and thorium in source material if contained
in the waste.
II. Certification
An authorized representative of the waste generator,
processor, or collector shall certify by signing and dating the shipment
manifest that the transported materials are properly classified, described,
packaged, marked, and labeled and are in proper condition for transportation
according to the applicable regulations of the United States Department of
Transportation and this agency. A collector in signing the certification is
certifying that nothing has been done to the collected waste that would
invalidate the waste generator’s certification.
III. Control and Tracking
A. Any licensee who transfers radioactive waste to a land
disposal facility or a licensed waste collector shall comply with the
requirements in paragraphs A.1. through A.9. of this appendix. Any licensee who
transfers waste to a licensed waste processor for waste treatment or repackaging
shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs A.4. through A.9. of this
appendix. A licensee shall:
1. Prepare all wastes so that the waste is classified
according to 10 CFR 61.55 and meets the waste characteristics requirements in 10
CFR 61.56;
2. Label each disposal container (or transport package if
potential radiation hazards preclude labeling of the individual disposal
container) of waste to identify whether it is Class A waste, Class B waste,
Class C waste, or greater than Class C waste, in accordance with 10 CFR
61.55;
3. Conduct a quality assurance program to ensure compliance
with 10 CFR 61.55 and 61.56 (the program must include management evaluation of
audits);
4. Prepare the Uniform Low–Level Radioactive Waste
Manifest as required by this appendix;
5. Forward a copy or electronically transfer the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest to the intended consignee so that
either (1) receipt of the manifest precedes the LLW shipment or (2) the manifest
is delivered to the consignee with the waste at the time the waste is
transferred to the consignee. Using both (1) and (2) is also
acceptable;
6. Include Form 540 (and Form 540A, if required) with the
shipment regardless of the option chosen in paragraph A.5. of this
section;
7. Receive acknowledgment of the receipt of the shipment in
the form of a signed copy of Form 540;
8. Retain a copy of or electronically store the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest and documentation of acknowledgment
of receipt as the record of transfer of licensed material as required by
641—subrule 39.4(41); and
9. For any shipments or any part of a shipment for which
acknowledgment of receipt has not been received within the times set forth in
this appendix, conduct an investigation in accordance with paragraph E of this
appendix.
B. Any waste collector licensee who handles only prepackaged
waste shall:
1. Acknowledge receipt of the waste from the shipper within
one week of receipt by returning a signed copy of Form 540;
2. Prepare a new manifest to reflect consolidated shipments
that meet the requirements of this appendix. The waste collector shall ensure
that, for each container of waste in the shipment, the manifest identifies the
generator of that container of waste;
3. Forward a copy or electronically transfer the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest to the intended consignee so that
either: (1) receipt of the manifest precedes the LLW shipment or (2) the
manifest is delivered to the consignee with the waste at the time the waste is
transferred to the consignee. Using both (1) and (2) is also
acceptable;
4. Include Form 540 (and Form 540A, if required) with the
shipment regardless of the option chosen in paragraph B.3. of this
section;
5. Receive acknowledgment of the receipt of the shipment in
the form of a signed copy of Form 540;
6. Retain a copy of or electronically store the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest and documentation of acknowledgment
of receipt as the record of transfer of licensed material as required by
641-subrule 39.4(41);
7. For any shipments or any part of a shipment for which
acknowledgment of receipt has not been received within the times set forth in
this appendix, conduct an investigation in accordance with paragraph E of this
appendix; and
8. Notify the shipper and this agency when any shipment, or
part of a shipment, has not arrived within 60 days after receipt of an advance
manifest, unless notified by the shipper that the shipment has been
canceled.
C. Any licensed waste processor who treats or repackages waste
shall:
1. Acknowledge receipt of the waste from the shipper within
one week of receipt by returning a signed copy of Form 540;
2. Prepare a new manifest that meets the requirements of this
appendix. Preparation of the new manifest reflects that the processor is
responsible for meeting these requirements. For each container of waste in the
shipment, the manifest shall identify the waste generators, the preprocessed
waste volume, and the other information as required in paragraph E.1. of this
appendix;
3. Prepare all wastes so that the waste is classified
according to 10 CFR 61.55 and meets the waste characteristics requirements in 10
CFR 61.56;
4. Label each package of waste to identify whether it is Class
A waste, Class B waste, or Class C waste, in accordance with 10 CFR 61.55 and
61.57;
5. Conduct a quality assurance program to ensure compliance
with 10 CFR 61.55 and 61.56 (the program shall include management evaluation of
audits);
6. Forward a copy or electronically transfer the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest to the intended consignee so that
either (1) receipt of the manifest precedes the LLW shipment or (2) the manifest
is delivered to the consignee with the waste at the time the waste is
transferred to the consignee. Using both (1) and (2) is also acceptable;
7. Include Form 540 (and Form 540A, if required) with the
shipment regardless of the option chosen in paragraph C.6. of this
section;
8. Receive acknowledgment of the receipt of the shipment in
the form of a signed copy of Form 540;
9. Retain a copy of or electronically store the Uniform
Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest and documentation of acknowledgment
of receipt as the record of transfer of licensed material as required by
641-subrule 39.4(41);
10. For any shipment or any part of a shipment for which
acknowledgment of receipt has not been received within the times set forth in
this appendix, conduct an investigation in accordance with paragraph E of this
appendix; and
11. Notify the shipper and this agency of any shipment, or
part of a shipment, that has not arrived within 60 days after receipt of an
advance manifest, unless notified by the shipper that the shipment has been
canceled.
D. The land disposal facility operator shall:
1. Acknowledge receipt of the waste within one week of receipt
by returning, as a minimum, a signed copy of Form 540 to the shipper. The
shipper to be notified is the licensee who last possessed the waste and
transferred the waste to the operator. If any discrepancy exists between
materials listed on the Uniform Low–Level Radioactive Waste Manifest and
materials received, copies or electronic transfer of the affected forms must be
returned indicating the discrepancy;
2. Maintain copies of all completed manifests and
electronically store the information required by 10 CFR 61.80(l) until the
license is terminated; and
3. Notify the shipper and this agency when any shipment, or
part of a shipment, has not arrived within 60 days after receipt of an advance
manifest, unless notified by the shipper that the shipment has been
canceled.
E. Any shipment or part of a shipment for which acknowledgment
is not received within the times set forth in this section must:
1. Be investigated by the shipper if the shipper has not
received notification or receipt within 20 days after transfer; and
2. Be traced and reported. The investigation shall include
tracing the shipment and filing a report with this agency. Each licensee who
conducts a trace investigation shall file a written report with this agency
within two weeks of completion of the investigation.
ITEM 37. Amend subrule 41.1(1) as
follows:
41.1(1) Scope. This rule establishes requirements,
for which a registrant is responsible, for use of X–ray equipment by or
under the supervision of an individual authorized by and licensed in accordance
with state statutes to engage in the healing arts or veterinary medicine. The
provisions of this rule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any
other applicable provisions of these rules. The provisions of Chapter 41 are in
addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of
641—Chapters 38 to 42. All references to any Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of July 1, 1999
May 10, 2000.
ITEM 38. Amend subrule 41.1(2),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
41.1(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter,
the definitions of 641—Chapter Chapters 38 and
40 may also apply. The following are specific to rule
41.1(136C)
641-
Chapter 41.
ITEM 39. Amend subrule 41.1(2) as
follows:
Adopt the following new definitions in
alphabetical order:
“Base density” means the optical density due to
the supporting base of the film alone. The base density of a film is the
optical density that would result if an unexposed film were processed through
the fixer, wash, and dryer, without first passing through the
developer.
“Base plus fog density” means the optical density
of a film due to its base density plus any action of the developer on the
unexposed silver halide crystals. The base plus fog density can be measured by
processing an unexposed film through the entire processing cycle and measuring
the resultant optical density.
“Cassette” means a light–tight case, usually
made of thin, low X–ray absorption plastic, for holding X–ray film.
One or two intensifying screens for the conversion of X–rays to visible
light photons are mounted inside the cassette so that they are in close contact
to the film.
“Control chart” means a chart used to record (and
control) the results of quality control testing as a function of time.
“Control limit” means the range of variation on a
control chart beyond which action must be taken to correct the results of
quality control testing.
“Dedicated mammography equipment” means
X–ray systems designed specifically for breast imaging, providing optimum
imaging geometry, a device for breast compression and low dose exposure that can
generate reproducible images of high quality.
“Densitometer” means an instrument which measures
the degree of blackening (or radiographic density) of film due to radiation or
light by measuring the ratio of the light intensity incident on the film to the
light intensity transmitted by the film.
“Detents” means mechanical settings that limit or
prevent the motion or rotation of an X–ray tube, cassette assembly, or
image receptor system.
“Developer” means a chemical solution (alkaline)
that changes the latent image (exposed silver halide crystals) on a film to a
visible image composed of minute masses of black metallic silver.
“Developer replenishment” means the process,
occurring as film travels past a certain point in the processor, triggering the
activation of a pump, whereby fresh developer is added in small amounts to the
solution in the developer tank of the processor. The purpose is to maintain the
proper alkalinity, chemical activity, and level of solution in the developer
tank.
“Diagnostic mammography” means mammography
performed on an individual who, by virtue of symptoms or physical findings, is
considered to have a substantial likelihood of having breast disease.
“Fixer” means a chemical solution (acidic) which
removes the unexposed and undeveloped silver halide crystals from film so it
will not discolor or darken with age or exposure to light. Fixer also hardens
the gelatin containing the black metallic silver so film may be dried and resist
damage from abrasions.
“Fixer retention” means the inadequate removal of
fixer from the film by the water in the wash tank of the processor. Retained
fixer causes eventual brown discoloration of the radiograph.
“Focal spot size” means the area of the target or
anode that is bombarded by electrons from the cathode of the X–ray tube to
produce X–rays. The smaller the focal spot, the better the limited
spatial resolution of the X–ray system, especially in magnification
mammography.
“Fog” means the density added to a radiograph due
to unwanted action of the developer on the unexposed silver halide crystals or
by light, radiation, chemical, or heat exposure during storage, handling, and
processing.
“Image contrast” means the amount of radiographic
density difference between adjacent areas resulting from a fixed amount of
attenuation difference or light exposure difference.
“Image noise.” See “Radiographic
noise.”
“Image quality” means the overall clarity and
detail of a radiographic image. Limiting spatial resolution (or resolving
power), image sharpness, and image contrast are three common measures of image
quality.
“Image sharpness” means the overall impression of
detail and clarity in a radiographic image.
“Processor” means an automated device which
transports film in a controlled manner by a system of rollers through
specialized sections where developing, fixing, washing, and drying of the film
occur.
“Quality assurance” means the overall program of
testing and maintaining the highest possible standards of quality in the
acquisition and interpretation of radiographic images.
“Quality control” means the actual process of
testing and maintaining the highest possible standards of quality in equipment
performance and the acquisition and interpretation of radiographic
images.
“Radiographic contrast” means the magnitude of
optical density difference between structures of interest and their
surroundings, or between areas of film receiving different amounts of
X–ray or visible light exposure.
“Radiographic noise” means unwanted fluctuations
in optical density on the screen–film image.
“Repeat (or reject) analysis” means a systematic
approach to determine the causes for radiographs being discarded or repeated, or
both.
“Replenishment rate” means the amount of chemicals
added in order to maintain the proper chemical activity of developer and fixer
solutions.
“Safelight” means a source of minimal visible
light in a darkroom, produced at frequencies (colors) to which the film is
insensitive, protecting the film from unwanted exposure (fog) while allowing
personnel to function more efficiently and safely.
“Screen” means microscopic phosphor crystals on a
plastic support used in conjunction with either single or double emulsion film;
the screen emits visible light when exposed to X–radiation, creating a
latent image on X–ray film.
“Screen–film combination” means a particular
intensifying screen used with a particular type of film. Care must be taken to
match the number of screens (one or two) to the number of emulsions coating the
film and to match the light output spectrum of the screen to the light
sensitivity of the film.
“Screen–film contact” means the close
proximity of the intensifying screen to the emulsion of the film, necessary in
order to achieve a sharp image on the film.
“Sensitometer” means a device used to reproducibly
expose a piece of film to a number of different levels of light
intensity.
“Sensitometric strip” means a sheet of film
exposed by a sensitometer, resulting in a gray scale range. Such strips are
used to measure the range of densities, from minimum to maximum, resulting from
a reproducible set of exposures.
“Sensitometry” means a quantitative measurement of
the response of film to exposure and development. Sensitometry is used to test
the processor setup and stability.
“Viewbox” means a device by which a uniform field
of white light is transmitted through an X–ray so that the image on the
film may be seen.
Amend the following definition:
“X–ray exposure control” means a
device, switch, button or similar means by which an operator initiates or
terminates the radiation exposure. The X–ray exposure control may include
such associated equipment as timers and backup timers.
ITEM 40. Amend subrule 41.1(2) by
rescinding the following definitions: “barrier,”
“beam–limiting device,” “detector,”
“kV,” “lead equivalent,” “leakage
radiation,” “light field,” “mA,” “primary
protective barrier,” “protective barrier,” “radiation
detector,” “secondary protective barrier,”
“shutter,” “SSD,” “stray radiation,”
“termination of irradiation,” and “tube housing
assembly.”
ITEM 41. Amend subparagraph
41.1(3)“a”(6) as follows:
(6) Gonad shielding of not less than 0.25
0.50 millimeter lead equivalent shall be used for human patients, who
have not passed the reproductive age, during radiographic procedures in which
the gonads are in the useful beam, except for cases in which this would
interfere with the diagnostic procedure.
ITEM 42. Amend
41.1(3)“f”(1)“2” as follows:
2. The temperature of solutions in the tanks shall be
maintained within the range of
60ºF to
80ºF
(16ºC to
27ºC).
Film shall be developed in accordance with the time–temperature
relationships recommended by the film manufacturer or, in the absence of
such recommendations, with the time–temperature chart available from the
agency.
ITEM 43. Amend
41.1(3)“f”(2)“1” as follows:
1. Films shall be developed in accordance with the
time–temperature relationships recommended by the film
manu–facturer; in the absence of such recommendations, the film
shall be developed using the chart available from the agency.
ITEM 44. Amend paragraph
41.1(3)“f” by adopting new subparagraph
(4) as follows:
(4) Records shall be maintained to verify that the items in
41.1(3)“f” are performed according to the requirements. Records may
be discarded only after an agency inspection has been completed and the facility
determined to be in compliance.
ITEM 45. Amend paragraph
41.1(4)“i” as follows:
i. Locks. All position locking, holding, and
centering devices on X–ray system components and systems shall function as
intended. All X–ray systems shall be maintained in good mechanical
repair and comply with all state and local electrical code
requirements.
ITEM 46. Amend subrule 41.1(6),
catchwords, as follows:
41.1(6) Radiographic systems, other than fluoroscopic,
dental intraoral, veterinary, or computed tomography X–ray
systems.
ITEM 47. Rescind
41.1(6)“h”(1)“3.”
ITEM 48. Amend subparagraph
41.1(7)“c”(5) as follows:
(5) Each X–ray exposure switch shall be located in such
a way as to meet the following requirements:
1. Stationary X–ray systems shall be required to
have the X–ray exposure switch so that the operator is required to remain
in the protected area during the entire exposure; and Stationary
X–ray systems shall be required to have the X–ray exposure switch
located in a protected area or have an exposure switch cord of sufficient length
to permit the operator to activate the unit while in a protected area, e.g.,
corridor outside the operatory. The procedures required under
41.1(3)“a”(4) must instruct the operator to remain in the protected
area during the entire exposure.
2. Mobile and portable X–ray systems which
are:
• Used for greater than one
week in the same location, i.e., a room or suite, shall meet the requirements of
41.1(7)“c”(5)“1.”
• Used for greater than one
hour and less than one week at the same location, i.e., a room or suite, shall
meet the requirements of the above paragraph or be provided with a 6.5 foot
(1.98 m) high protective barrier or means to allow the operator to be at least 9
feet (2.7 meters) from the tube housing assembly while making
exposure.
ITEM 49. Amend subrule 41.1(9) by
adopting the following new paragraphs:
e. Bone densitometry on human patients shall be conducted only
under a prescription of a licensed physician, a licensed physician assistant as
defined in Iowa Code section 148C.1, subsection 6, or a licensed registered
nurse who is registered as an advanced registered nurse practitioner pursuant to
Iowa Code chapter 152.
f. During the operation of the bone densitometry
system:
(1) The operator, ancillary personnel, and members of the
general public shall be positioned at least one meter from the patient and bone
densitometry system during the examination.
(2) The operator shall advise the patient that the bone
densitometry examination is a type of X–ray procedure.
g. Equipment shall be maintained and operated in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specifications. Records of maintenance shall be
kept for inspection by the agency.
ITEM 50. Amend subrule 41.1(11),
paragraph “a,” introductory paragraph, as follows:
a. Definitions. In addition to the definitions provided in
641—38.2(136C),
641-40.2(136C), and 41.1(2), the
following definitions shall be applicable to 41.1(11):
ITEM 51. Amend subrule 41.2(14),
paragraph “c,” as follows:
c. When a misadministration involves a diagnostic procedure,
the radiation safety officer shall promptly investigate its cause, make a record
for agency review, and retain the record as directed in 41.2(14)“d.”
The licensee shall also notify the referring physician and the agency in writing
on IDPH Form #588–2608 or equivalent within 15 days if the
misadministration involved the use of radioactive material not intended for
medical use, administration of dosage five–fold different from the
intended dosage, or administration of radioactive material such that the patient
or human research subject is likely to receive an organ dose greater
than 2 rems (0.02 Sv) or a whole body dose greater than 500 millirems (5
mSv) a dose exceeding 5 rem (0.05 Sv) effective dose equivalent or
50 rem (0.5 Sv) dose equivalent to any individual organ. Licensees may use
dosimetry tables in package inserts, corrected only for amount of radioactivity
administered, to determine whether a report is required.
ITEM 52. Amend subparagraph
41.2(60)“a”(2), numbered paragraphs
“1” and “2,” as follows:
1. Radiation levels dose rates in
restricted areas are not likely to cause personnel exposures
any occupationallyexposed individual to receive a dose in excess of the
limits specified in 641—40.15(136C); and
2. Radiation levels dose rates in
controlled or unrestricted areas do not exceed are
not likely to cause any individual member of the public to receive a dose in
excess of the limits specified in 641—40.26(136C).
ITEM 53. Amend subrule 41.2(62),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
41.2(62) Modification of teletherapy unit or room
before beginning a treatment program. If the survey required by 41.2(60)
indicates that an individual in an unrestricted area may be exposed to
levels of radiation any individual member of the public is likely to
receive a dose greater than those permitted by 641—40.26(136C) before
beginning the treatment program, the licensee shall:
ITEM 54. Amend subrule 41.3(1),
paragraph “b,” as follows:
b. The use of therapeutic radiation machines shall beby, or
under the supervision of, a physician who meets the training/experience criteria
established by 41.3(4)“c.”
41.3(5).
ITEM 55. Amend subrule 41.3(2),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
41.3(2) Definitions. In addition to the
definitions provided in 641-38.2(136C)
and 641-40.2(136C),
The the following definitions are specific to
641—41.3(136C).
ITEM 56. Amend subrule 41.3(2) by
rescinding the following definitions: “beam axis,” “kilo
electron volt (keV),” “radiation detector,” and
“target–to–skin distance (TSD).”
ITEM 57. Amend subrule 41.3(2),
definition of “filter,” as follows:
“Filter” means material placed in the useful beam
to change beam quality or its intensity profile in therapeutic radiation
machines subject to subrule 41.3(6).
ITEM 58. Amend subrule 41.3(12) as
follows:
41.3(12) Records retention. All records required by
641—41.3(136C) shall be retained until disposal is authorized by the
agency unless another retention period is specifically authorized in 41.3(136C).
All required records shall be retained in an active file from at least the
time of generation until the next agency inspection. Any required record
generated before the last agency inspection may be microfilmed or otherwise
archived as long as a complete copy can be retrieved until such time the agency
authorizes final disposal.
ITEM 59. Rescind and reserve subrule
41.3(13).
ITEM 60. Amend subparagraph
41.3(17)“a”(1) by adopting new numbered
paragraph “3” as follows:
3. For each therapeutic machine, the registrant shall
determine, or obtain from the manufacturer, the leakage radiation existing at
positions specified in 41.3(17)“a”(1)“1” and
41.3(17)“a”(1)“2” for the specified operating
conditions. Records on leakage radiation measurements shall be maintained at
the facility for inspection by the agency.
ITEM 61. Amend subparagraph
41.3(18)“a”(15) as follows:
(15) Selection of energy. Equipment capable of generating
radiation beams of different energies shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Irradiation shall not be possible until a selection of
energy has been made at the treatment control panel;
2. The nominal energy value selected shall be displayed at the
treatment control panel before and during
irradiation; until reset
manually for the next irradiation. After termination of irradiation, it shall
be necessary to reset the nominal energy value selected before subsequent
treatment can be initiated; and
3. Irradiation shall not be possible until the appropriate
flattening filter or scattering foil for the selected energy is in its proper
location.
ITEM 62. Amend subrule 41.3(18) as
follows:
Amend paragraph “e” as follows:
e. Full calibration measurements.
(1) Full calibration of a therapeutic radiation machine
subject to 41.3(18) shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of, a
radiation therapy physicist:
1. Before the first medical use following installation or
reinstallation of the therapeutic radiation machine;
2. At intervals not to exceed 12 months;
and
2. Full calibration shall include measurement of all
parameters listed in Appendix D of 641—Chapter 41. Although it shall not
be necessary to complete all elements of a full calibration at the same time,
all parameters (for all energies) shall be completed at intervals not to exceed
12 calendar months, unless a more frequent interval is required by this
agency.
3. Before medical use under the following
conditions:
• Whenever quality assurance
check measurements indicate that the radiation output differs by more than 5
percent from the value obtained at the last full calibration and the difference
cannot be reconciled; and
• Following any component
replacement, major repair, or modification of components that could
significantly affect the characteristics of the radiation beam. If the
repair, replacement or modification does not affect all modes or energies, full
calibration shall be performed on the effected mode/energy that is in most
frequent clinical use at the facility. The remaining energies/modes may be
validated with quality assurance check procedures against the criteria in
41.3(18)“e”(1)“3.”
4. Notwithstanding the requirements of
41.3(18)“e”(1) “3”:
• Full
calibration of therapeutic radiation machines with multienergy or multimode
capabilities is required only for those modes or energies that are not within
their acceptable range; and
• If
the repair, replacement or modification does not affect all modes or energies,
full calibration shall be performed on the effected mode/energy that is in most
frequent clinical use at the facility. The remaining energies/modes may be
validated with quality assurance check procedures against the criteria in
41.3(18)“e”(1)“3.”
(2) To satisfy the requirement of
41.3(18)“e”(1), full calibration shall include all measurements
required for annual calibration by Appendix D of 641—Chapter
41.
(3) (2) The registrant shall use the
dosimetry system described in 41.3(16)“c” to measure the radiation
output for one set of exposure conditions. The remaining radiation
measurements required in 41.3(18)“e”(2) may then be
made using a dosimetry system that indicates relative dose rates;
and
(4) (3) The registrant shall maintain
a record of each calibration for the duration of the registration. The record
shall include the date of the calibration, the manufacturer’s name, model
number, and serial number for the therapeutic radiation machine, the model
numbers and serial numbers of the instruments used to calibrate the therapeutic
radiation machine, and the signature of the radiation therapy physicist
responsible for performing the calibration.
Amend paragraph “f,” subparagraphs
(1) and (3), as follows:
(1) Periodic quality assurance checks shall be performed on
all therapeutic radiation machines subject to 41.3(18) at intervals not
to exceed one week; as specified in Appendix D of
641-Chapter 41;
(3) The registrant shall use a dosimetry system which has been
compared intercompared within the previous 12 months
with the dosimetry system described in 41.3(16)“c”(1) to make the
periodic quality assurance checks required in
41.3(18)“f”(2);
ITEM 63. Amend subrule 41.6(1),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
41.6(1) Definitions. In addition to the definitions
provided in 641—38.2(136C), 641—40.2(136C), and 641—
41.1(136C), the following definitions shall be applicable to this
rule.
ITEM 64. Amend subrule 41.6(1) by
rescinding the following definitions: “base density,” “base
plus fog density,” “cassette,” “control chart,”
“control limit,” “densitometer,” “detents,”
“developer,” “developer replenishment,”
“diagnostic mammography,” “fixer,” “fixer
retention,” “focal spot size,” “fog,”
“half–value layer (HVL),” “image contrast,”
“image quality,” “image sharpness,” “kilovoltage,
peak (kVp),” “milliampere (mA) setting,” “milliampere
seconds (mAs),” “physician consultant,”
“processor,” “quality assurance,” “quality
control,” “quality control technologist,” “radiographic
contrast,” “radiographic noise,” “radiographic
sharpness,” “repeat (or reject) analysis,”
“replenishment rate,” “safelight,” “screen,”
“screen–film combination,” “screen–film
contact,” “sensitometer,” “sensitometric strip,”
“sensitometry,” “thermoluminescent dosimeter (TLD),” and
“viewbox.”
ITEM 65. Amend subrule 41.6(1) as
follows:
Amend the following definition:
“Phantom” means an artificial test object
which simulates the average composition of and various structures within
the breast. A “good breast phantom” should have an established
correlation with clinical image quality, allowing objective rather than
subjective analysis, and should be sensitive to small changes in mammographic
image quality. used to simulate radiographic characteristics of
compressed breast tissue and containing components that radiographically model
aspects of breast disease and cancer.
Adopt the following new definitions in
alphabetical order:
“Accreditation body” means an entity that has been
approved by FDA to accredit mammography facilities.
“Action limits” or “action levels”
means the minimum and maximum values of a quality assurance measurement that can
be interpreted as representing acceptable performance with respect to the
parameter being tested. Values less than the minimum or greater than the
maximum action limit or level indicate that corrective action must be taken by
the facility. Action limits or levels are also sometimes called control limits
or levels.
“Adverse event” means an undesirable experience
associated with mammography activities. Adverse events include but are not
limited to:
1. Poor image quality;
2. Failure to send mammography reports within 30 days to the
referring physician or in a timely manner to the self–referred patient;
and
3. Use of personnel who do not meet the applicable
requirements of this chapter.
“Air kerma” means kerma in a given mass of air.
The unit used to measure the quantity of air kerma is the Gray (Gy). For
X–rays with energies less than 300 kiloelectronvolts (keV), 1 Gray of
absorbed dose is delivered by 114 roentgens (R) of exposure.
“Breast implant” means a prosthetic device
implanted in the breast.
“Calendar quarter” means any one of the following
time periods during a given year: January 1 through March 31, April 1 through
June 30, July 1 through September 30, or October 1 through December
31.
“Category 1” means medical education activities
that have been designated as Category 1 by the Accreditation Council for
Continuing Medical Education (ACCME), the American Osteopathic Association
(AOA), a state medical society, or an equivalent organization.
“Certificate” means the certificate described in
41.6(2)“a”(2).
“Certification” means the process of approval of a
facility by the FDA or this agency to provide mammography services.
“Clinical image” means a mammogram.
“Consumer” means an individual who chooses to
comment or complain in reference to a mammography examination, including the
patient or representative of the patient (e.g., family member or referring
physician).
“Contact hour” means an hour of training received
through direct instruction.
“Continuing education unit” or “continuing
education credit” means one contact hour of training.
“Direct instruction” means:
1. Face–to–face interaction between instructor(s)
and student(s), as when the instructor provides a lecture, conducts
demonstrations, or reviews student performance; or
2. The administration and correction of student examinations
by an instructor(s) with subsequent feedback to the student(s).
“Direct supervision” means that:
1. During joint interpretation of mammograms, the supervising
interpreting physician reviews, discusses, and confirms the diagnosis of the
physician being supervised and signs the resulting report before it is entered
into the patient’s records; or
2. During the performance of a mammography examination or
survey of the facility’s equipment and quality assurance program, the
supervisor is present to observe and correct, as needed, the performance of the
individual being supervised who is performing the examination or conducting the
survey.
“Facility” means a hospital, outpatient
department, clinic, radiology practice, mobile unit, office of a physician, or
other facility that conducts mammography activities, including the following:
operation of equipment to produce a mammogram, initial interpretation of the
mammogram, and maintaining viewing conditions for that interpretation. This
term does not include a facility of the Department of Veterans
Affairs.
“FDA” means the Food and Drug
Administration.
“First allowable time” means the earliest time a
resident physician is eligible to take the diagnostic radiology boards from an
FDA–designated certifying body. The “first allowable time”
may vary with the certifying body.
“Interpreting physician” means a licensed
radiologist who interprets mammograms and who meets the requirements set forth
in 41.6(3)“a.”
“Kerma” means the sum of the initial energies of
all the charged particles liberated by uncharged ionizing particles in a
material of given mass.
“Laterality” means the designation of either the
right or left breast.
“Lead interpreting physician” means the
interpreting physician assigned the general responsibility for ensuring that a
facility’s quality assurance program meets all of the requirements of this
chapter. The administrative title and other supervisory responsibilities of the
individual, if any, are left to the discretion of the facility.
“Mammogram” means a radiographic image produced
through mammography.
“Mammographic modality” means a technology for
radiography of the breast. Examples are screen–film mammography,
xeromammography, and digital mammography.
“Mammography” means radiography of the breast but,
for the purposes of 641—41.6(136C), does not include:
1. Radiography of the breast performed during invasive
interventions for localization or biopsy procedures; or
2. Radiography of the breast performed with an investigational
mammography device as part of a scientific study conducted in accordance with
FDA investigational device exemption regulations.
“Mammography equipment evaluation” means an
on–site assessment of the mammography unit or image processor performance
by a medical physicist for the purpose of making a preliminary determination as
to whether the equipment meets all of the applicable standards.
“Mammography medical outcomes audit” means a
systematic collection of mammography results and the comparison of those results
with outcomes data.
“Mammography unit(s)” means an assemblage of
components for the production of X–rays for use during mammography
including, at a minimum: an X–ray generator, an X–ray control, a
tube housing assembly, a beam limiting device, and the supporting structures for
these components.
“Mean optical density” means the average of the
optical densities measured using phantom thicknesses of 2, 4, and 6 centimeters
with values of kilovolt peak (kVp) clinically appropriate for those
thicknesses.
“Medical physicist” means a person trained in
evaluating the performance of mammography equipment and facility quality
assurance programs and who meets the qualifications for a medical physicist set
forth in 41.6(3)“c.”
“MQSA” means the Mammography Quality Standards
Act of 1992.
“Multi–reading” means two or more
physicians, at least one of whom is an interpreting physician, interpreting the
same mammogram.
“Patient” means any individual who undergoes a
mammography evaluation in a facility, regardless of whether the person is
referred by a physician or is self–referred.
“Phantom image” means a radiographic image of a
phantom.
“Physical science” means physics, chemistry,
radiation science (including medical physics and health physics), and
engineering.
“Positive mammogram” means a mammogram that has an
overall assessment of findings that are either “suspicious” or
“highly suggestive of malignancy.”
“Qualified instructor” means individuals whose
training and experience adequately prepare them to carry out specified training
assignments. Interpreting physicians, radiologic technologists, or medical
physicists who meet the requirements of 41.6(3) would be considered qualified
instructors in their respective areas of mammography. Other examples of
individuals who may be qualified instructors for the purpose of providing
training to meet the regulations of this chapter include, but are not limited
to, instructors in a post–high school training institution and
manufacturers’ representatives.
“Quality control technologist” means an individual
meeting the requirements of 41.6(5)“a”(4) who is responsible for
those quality assurance responsibilities not assigned to the lead interpreting
physician or to the medical physicist.
“Radiographic equipment” means X–ray
equipment used for the production of static X–ray images.
“Radiologic technologist” means an individual
specifically trained in the use of radiographic equipment and in the positioning
of patients for radiographic examinations and who meets the requirements set
forth in 41.6(3)“b.”
“Serious adverse event” means an adverse event
that may significantly compromise clinical outcomes or an adverse event for
which a facility fails to take appropriate corrective action in a timely
manner.
“Serious complaint” means a report of a serious
adverse event.
“Standard breast” means a 4.2 centimeter (cm)
thick compressed breast consisting of 50 percent glandular and 50 percent
adipose tissue.
“Survey” means an on–site physics
consultation and evaluation of a facility quality assurance program performed by
a medical physicist.
“Time cycle” means the film development
time.
“Traceable to a national standard” means an
instrument is calibrated at either the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) or at a calibration laboratory that participates in a
proficiency program with NIST at least once every two years and the results of
the proficiency test conducted within 24 months of calibration show agreement
within ? 3 percent of the national standard in
the mammography energy range.
ITEM 66. Amend subrule 41.6(2),
paragraphs “a” and “b,” as
follows:
a. Registration and certificates.
(1) Each radiation machine used to perform mammography
shall be registered according to 641—subrule 39.3(2).
(2) A certificate issued by the FDA or this agency is
required for lawful operation of all mammography facilities subject to the
provisions of this subrule. To obtain a certificate from the FDA or this
agency, facilities are required to meet the quality standards in
641-41.6(136C) and to be accredited and
approved by an approved accreditation body.
b. Each facility wishing to perform mammography shall apply
for agency authorization by providing or verifying the following information for
each mammography machine:
(1) to (5) No change.
(6) The entire mammography system is evaluated annually by a
radiation physicist medical physicist.
(7) No change.
(8) Provisional authorization. A new facility beginning
operation after September 30, 1994, is eligible to apply for a provisional
authorization. This will enable the facility to perform mammography and to
obtain the clinical images needed to complete the accreditation process. To
apply for and receive a provisional authorization, a facility must meet the
requirements of 641-41.6(136C). A
provisional authorization shall be effective for up to six months from the date
of issuance and cannot be renewed. The facility may apply for a 90–day
extension.
ITEM 67. Amend subrule 41.6(2),
paragraph “c,” as follows:
c. Withdrawal or denial of mammography
authorization.
(1) Mammography authorization may be withdrawn with cause if
any facility or machine does not meet one or more of the standards of
these rules, will not permit inspections or provide access to records or
information in a timely fashion, or has been guilty of misrepresentation in
obtaining the authorization.
(2) The facility shall have opportunity for a hearing in
connection with a denial or withdrawal of mammography authorization in
accordance with 641-Chapter
173.
(3) An emergency order withdrawing authorization may be issued
in accordance with
641-173.31(17A) if the agency finds
the radiation unit or facility violates rules that seriously affect the health,
safety, and welfare of the public. An opportunity for hearing shall be held
within five working days after the issuance of the order. The order shall be
effective during the proceedings.
(4) If authorization is withdrawn, the radiation machine shall
not be used for mammography until reinstated.
(5) If a facility’s authorization is revoked, no
person who owned or operated that facility at the time the act occurred may own
or operate a mammography facility in Iowa within two years of the date of
revocation.
ITEM 68. Rescind subrule 41.6(3) and
adopt the following new subrule in lieu thereof:
41.6(3) Mammography personnel. The following
requirements apply to all personnel involved in any aspect of mammography,
including the production, processing, and interpretation of mammograms and
related quality assurance activities:
a. Interpreting physicians. All radiologists interpreting
mammograms shall meet the following qualifications:
(1) Initial qualifications. Unless the exemption in
41.6(3)“a”(3)“1” applies, before beginning to interpret
mammograms independently, the interpreting radiologist shall:
1. Be licensed to practice medicine in Iowa;
2. Be certified in an appropriate specialty area by a body
determined by FDA to have procedures and requirements adequate to ensure that
physicians certified by the body are competent to interpret radiological
procedures, including mammography; or
• Have had at least three
months of documented formal training in the interpretation of mammograms and in
topics related to mammography. The training shall include instruction in
radiation physics, including radiation physics specific to mammography,
radiation effects, and radiation protection. The mammographic interpretation
component shall be under the direct supervision of a radiologist who meets the
requirements of 41.6(3)“a”;
3. Have a minimum of 60 hours of documented medical education
in mammography, which shall include: instruction in the interpretation of
mammograms and education in basic breast anatomy, pathology, physiology,
technical aspects of mammography, and quality assurance and quality control in
mammography. All 60 of these hours shall be category I and at least 15 of the
category I hours shall have been acquired within the three years immediately
prior to the date that the radiologist qualifies as an interpreting physician.
Hours spent in residency specifically devoted to mammography will be considered
as equivalent to category I continuing medical education credits and will be
accepted if documented in writing by the appropriate representative of the
training institution; and
4. Unless the exemption in
41.6(3)“a”(3)“2” applies, have interpreted or
multi–read at least 240 mammographic examinations within the
six–month period immediately prior to the date that the radiologist
qualifies as an interpreting physician. This interpretation or
multi–reading shall be under the direct supervision of an interpreting
physician.
(2) Continuing experience and education. All interpreting
physicians shall maintain their qualifications by meeting the following
requirements:
1. Following the second anniversary date of the end of the
calendar quarter in which the requirements of 41.6(3)“a”(1) were
completed, the interpreting physician shall have interpreted or multi–read
at least 960 mammographic examinations during the 24 months immediately
preceding the date of the facility’s annual MQSA inspection or the last
day of the calendar quarter immediately preceding the inspection or any date in
between the two. The facility will choose one of these dates to determine the
24–month period;
2. Following the third anniversary date of the end of the
calendar quarter in which the requirements of 41.6(3)“a”(1) were
completed, the interpreting physician shall have taught or completed at least 15
category I continuing education units in mammography during the 36 months
immediately preceding the date of the facility’s annual MQSA inspection or
the last day of the calendar quarter immediately preceding the inspection or any
date in between the two. The facility will choose one of these dates to
determine the 36–month period. This training shall include at least six
category I continuing medical education credits in each mammographic modality
used by the interpreting physician in the interpreting physician’s
practice; and
3. Before an interpreting physician may begin independently
interpreting mammograms produced by a new mammographic modality, that is, a
mammographic modality in which the physician has not previously been trained,
the interpreting physician shall have at least 8 hours of training in the new
mammographic modality.
4. Units earned through teaching a specific course can be
counted only once towards the 15 required by
41.6(3)“a”(2)“2” even if the course is taught multiple
times during the previous 36 months.
(3) Exemptions.
1. Those physicians who qualified as interpreting physicians
under 41.6(3)“a” or FDA interim regulations prior to April 28, 1999,
are considered to have met the initial requirements of 41.6(3)“a.”
They may continue to interpret mammograms provided they continue to meet the
licensure requirements of 41.6(3)“a”(1)“1” and the
continuing experience and education requirements of this subrule.
2. Physicians who have interpreted or multi–read at
least 240 mammographic examinations under the direct supervision of an
interpreting physician in any six–month period during the last two years
of a diagnostic radiology residency and who become appropriately board certified
at the first allowable time, as defined by an eligible certifying body, are
otherwise exempt from 41.6(3)“a”(1)“4.”
(4) Reestablishing qualifications. Interpreting physicians
who fail to maintain the required continuing experience or continuing education
requirements shall reestablish their qualifications before resuming the
independent interpretation of mammograms, as follows:
1. Interpreting physicians who fail to meet the continuing
experience requirements of 41.6(3)“a”(2)“1”
shall:
• Interpret or
multi–read at least 240 mammographic examinations under the direct
supervision of an interpreting physician, or
• Interpret or
multi–read a sufficient number of mammographic examinations, under the
direct supervision of an interpreting physician, to bring the physician’s
total up to 960 examinations for the prior 24 months, whichever is
less.
The interpretations required under
41.6(3)“a”(4)“1” shall be done within the six months
immediately prior to resuming independent interpretation.
2. Interpreting physicians who fail to meet the continuing
education requirements of 41.6(3)“a”(2)“2” shall obtain
a sufficient number of additional category I continuing medical education
credits in mammography to bring their total up to the required 15 credits in the
previous 36 months before resuming independent interpretation.
b. Radiologic technologists. All mammographic examinations
shall be performed by general radiographers who meet the following general
requirements, mammography requirements, and continuing education and experience
requirements:
(1) General requirements. Be permitted to operate as a
general radiographer in Iowa; and
(2) Mammography requirements. Prior to April 28, 1999, have
qualified as a radiologic technologist under 41.6(3)“b” or have
completed at least 40 contact hours of documented training specific to
mammography under the supervision of a qualified instructor. The hours of
documented training shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Training in breast anatomy and physiology, positioning and
compression, quality assurance/quality control techniques, and imaging of
patients with breast implants;
2. The performance of a minimum of 25 examinations under the
direct supervision of an individual qualified under 41.6(3)“b”;
and
3. At least 8 hours of training in each mammography modality
to be used by the technologist in performing mammography examinations;
and
(3) Continuing education requirements.
1. Following the third anniversary date of the end of the
calendar quarter in which the requirements of 41.6(3)“b”(1) were
completed, the radiologic technologist shall have taught or completed at least
15 continuing education units in mammography during the 36 months immediately
preceding the date of the facility’s annual MQSA inspection or the last
day of the calendar quarter preceding the inspection or any date in between the
two. The facility will choose one of these dates to determine the
36–month period.
2. Units earned through teaching a specific course can be
counted only once towards the 15 required in
41.6(3)“b”(3)“1” even if the course is taught multiple
times during the previous 36 months.
3. At least 6 of the continuing education units required in
this subrule shall be related to each mammographic modality used by the
technologist.
4. Requalification. Radiologic technologists who fail to meet
the continuing education requirements of
41.6(3)“b”(3)“1” shall obtain a sufficient number of
continuing education units in mammography to bring their total up to at least 15
in the previous three years, at least 6 of which shall be related to each
modality used by the technologist in mammography. The technologist may not
resume performing unsupervised mammography examinations until the continuing
education requirements are completed.
5. Before a radiologic technologist may begin independently
performing mammographic examinations using a mammographic modality other than
one of those for which the technologist received training under
41.6(3)“b”(2)“3,” the technologist shall have at least 8
hours of continuing education units in the new modality.
(4) Continuing experience requirements.
1. Following the second anniversary date of the end of the
calendar quarter in which the requirements of 41.6(3)“b”(1) and (2)
were completed or October 28, 1999, whichever is later, the radiologic
technologist shall have performed a minimum of 200 mammography examinations
during the 24 months immediately preceding the date of the facility’s
annual inspection or the last day of the calendar quarter preceding the
inspection or any date in between the two. The facility will choose one of
these dates to determine the 24–month period.
2. Requalification. Radiologic technologists who fail to meet
the continuing experience requirements of this subrule shall perform a minimum
of 25 mammography examinations under the direct supervision of a qualified
radiologic technologist before resuming the performance of unsupervised
mammography examinations.
c. Medical physicists. All medical physicists conducting
surveys of mammography facilities and providing oversight of the facility
quality assurance program under 41.6(3)“c”(2) shall meet the
following:
(1) Initial qualifications.
1. Be Iowa approved; and
2. Have a master’s degree or higher in a physical
science from an accredited institution, with no less than 20 semester hours or
30 quarter hours of college undergraduate or graduate level physics;
3. Have 20 contact hours of documented specialized training in
conducting surveys of mammography facilities; and
4. Have experience conducting surveys in at least one
mammography facility and have a total of at least 10 mammography units. No more
than one survey of a specific unit within a period of 60 days can be counted
towards the total mammography unit survey requirement. After April 28, 1999,
experience conducting surveys must be acquired under the direct supervision of a
medical physicist who meets all the requirements of this subrule; or
(2) Alternative initial qualifications.
1. Have qualified as a medical physicist under FDA interim
regulations and have retained that qualification by maintenance of the active
status of any licensure, approval, or certification required under the interim
regulations; and
2. Prior to April 28, 1999, have:
• A bachelor’s degree
or higher in a physical science from an accredited institution with no less than
10 semester hours or equivalent of college undergraduate or graduate level
physics,
• Forty contact hours of
documented specialized training in conducting surveys of mammography facilities,
and
• Have experience conducting
surveys in at least one mammography facility and have a total of at least 20
mammography units. No more than one survey of a specific unit within a period
of 60 days can be counted towards the total mammography unit survey requirement.
The training and experience requirements must be met after fulfilling the degree
requirement.
(3) Continuing qualifications.
1. Continuing education. Following the third anniversary date
of the end of the calendar quarter in which the requirements of
41.6(3)“c”(1) or (2) were completed, the medical physicist shall
have taught or completed at least 15 continuing education units in mammography
during the 36 months immediately preceding the date of the facility’s
annual inspection or the last day of the calendar quarter preceding the
inspection or any date in between the two. The facility shall choose one of
these dates to determine the 36–month period. This continuing education
shall include hours of training appropriate to each mammographic modality
evaluated by the medical physicist during the physicist’s surveys or
oversight of quality assurance programs. Units earned through teaching a
specific course can be counted only once towards the required 15 units in a
36–month period, even if the course is taught multiple times during the 36
months.
2. Continuing experience. Following the second anniversary
date of the end of the calendar quarter in which the requirements of this
subrule were completed or April 28, 1999, whichever is later, the medical
physicist shall have surveyed at least two mammography facilities and a total of
at least 6 mammography units during the 24 months immediately preceding the date
of the facility’s annual MQSA inspection or the last day of the calendar
quarter immediately preceding the inspection or any date between the two. The
facility shall choose one of these dates to determine the 24–month period.
No more than one survey of a specific facility within a 10–month period or
a specific unit within a period of 60 days can be counted towards this
requirement.
3. Before a medical physicist may begin independently
performing mammographic surveys of a new mammographic modality, that is, a
mammographic modality other than one for which the physicist received training
to qualify under this subrule, the physicist must receive at least 8 hours of
training in surveying units of the new mammographic modality.
(4) Reestablishing qualifications. Medical physicists who
fail to maintain the required continuing qualifications of this subrule may not
perform the MQSA surveys without the supervision of a qualified medical
physicist. Before independently surveying another facility, medical physicists
must reestablish their qualifications as follows:
1. Medical physicists who fail to meet the continuing
education requirements of this subrule shall obtain a sufficient number of
continuing education units to bring their total units up to the required 15 in
the previous three years.
2. Medical physicists who fail to meet the continuing
experience requirements of this subrule shall complete a sufficient number of
surveys under the direct supervision of a medical physicist who meets the
qualifications of this subrule to bring their total surveys up to the required
two facilities and 6 units in the previous 24 months. No more than one survey
of a specific unit within a period of 60 days can be counted towards the total
mammography unit survey requirement.
d. Retention of personnel records. Facilities shall maintain
records to document the qualifications of all personnel who worked at the
facility as interpreting physicians, general radiographers, or medical
physicists. These records must be available for review by the MQSA inspectors.
Records of personnel no longer employed by the facility should not be discarded
until the next annual inspection has been completed and the agency has
determined that the facility is in compliance with the MQSA personnel
requirements.
ITEM 69. Amend subrule 41.6(4) as
follows:
41.6(4) Obtaining and preserving records.
a. The supplier facility of the
current mammography examination must make all reasonable efforts to obtain the
patient’s recent mammography records, including original images or films,
copies of written reports prepared by interpreting physicians, and other
relevant information pertinent to previous mammograms that might be available
from others, for comparison with the current mammography records.
b. The supplier facility must make,
for each patient, a record of the mammography services it provides,
including: a written report of each mammography examination
performed. This report shall include:
(1) The date the mammography procedure was performed.
and
(2) the The date of the
interpretation.
(3) The name of the interpreting physician.
(2) (4) The name of the patient
and an additional patient identifier.
(3) The name of the operator of the equipment and the
interpreting physician.
(4) (5) A description of the
procedures performed.
(5) (6) The name of the referring
physician (if any) or other physician (if any) identified by the patient to
receive the interpreting physician’s written report.
(6) (7) The date the interpreting
physician’s written report was sent to the appropriate physician or
patient.
(8) A separate and distinct section entitled,
“Overall Final Assessment” with findings classified in one of the
following categories or an approved equivalent:
1. “Negative”: Nothing to comment upon (if the
interpreting physician is aware of clinical findings or symptoms, despite the
negative assessment, these shall be explained).
2. “Benign”: Also a negative
assessment.
3. “Probably benign”: Finding(s) has a high
probability of being benign.
4. “Suspicious”: Finding(s) without all the
characteristic morphology of breast cancer but indicating a definite probability
of being malignant.
5. “Highly suggestive of malignancy”:
Finding(s) has a high probability of being malignant.
6. In cases where no final assessment category can be
assigned due to incomplete workup, “Incomplete: Need additional imaging
evaluation” shall be assigned as an assessment, and reasons why no
assessment can be made shall be stated by the interpreting
physician.
(9) Recommendations made to the health care provider about
what additional actions, if any, should be taken. All clinical questions raised
by the referring health care provider shall be addressed in the report to the
extent possible, even if the assessment is negative or benign.
c. Preservation of records.
(1) The supplier facility must provide
satisfactory assurances (as documented in its medical records) that the images
or films of the first and subsequent mammography procedures and the related
written reports of the interpreting physician for each patient are either placed
in the patient’s medical record kept by the supplier
facility or sent for placement in the patient’s medical record as
directed by the patient’s physician or the patient.
(2) Records retained by the supplier
facility must be retained for at least 60 calendar months following the
date of service or not less than ten years, if no additional mammograms of the
patient are performed.
(3) If the supplier facility should
cease to exist before the end of the 60–month period, the records must be
transferred to the patient or patient’s physician or other mammographic
facility.
(4) The facility shall upon request by, or on behalf of,
the patient, permanently or temporarily, transfer the original mammograms and
copies of the patient’s reports to a medical institution, or to a
physician or health care provider of the patient, or to the patient
directly.
(5) Any fee charged to the patient for providing the
services in subparagraph (4) above shall not exceed the documented costs
associated with this service.
d. Communication of results to the patient. Each facility
shall maintain a system to ensure that the results of each mammographic
examination are communicated in lay terms to each patient in a time period not
to exceed 30 days from the date of the mammography examination. If assessments
are “Suspicious” or “Highly suggestive of malignancy”
and the patient has not named a health care provider, the facility shall make
reasonable attempts to ensure that the results are communicated to the patient
as soon as possible.
(1) As soon as possible, but no later than 30 days from the
date of the mammography examination, patients who do not name a health care
provider to receive the mammography report shall be sent the report described in
41.6(4)“e”(1) in addition to a written notification of results in
lay terms.
(2) Each facility that accepts patients who do not have a
primary care provider shall maintain a system for referring such patients to a
health care provider when clinically indicated.
e. Communication of results to health care providers. When
the patient has a referring health care provider or the patient has named a
health care provider, the facility shall:
(1) Provide a written report of the mammography
examination, including all of the items listed in 41.6(4)“b,” to the
health care provider as soon as possible, but no later than 30 days from the
date of the examination, and
(2) If the assessment is “Suspicious” or
“Highly suggestive of malignancy,” make reasonable attempts to
communicate with the health care provider as soon as possible or, if the health
care provider is unavailable, to a responsible des–ignee of the health
care provider.
f. Mammographic image identification. Each mammographic
image shall have the following information indicated on it in a permanent,
legible, and unambiguous manner and placed so as not to obscure anatomic
structures:
(1) Name of patient and an additional patient
identifier.
(2) Date of examination.
(3) View and laterality. This information shall be placed
on the image in a position near the axilla. Standardized codes specified by the
accreditation body and approved by the FDA shall be used to identify view and
laterality.
(4) Facility name and location. At a minimum, the location
shall include the city, state, and ZIP code of the facility.
(5) Technologist identification.
(6) Cassette/screen identification.
(7) Mammography unit identification, if there is more than
one unit in the facility.
ITEM 70. Amend subrule 41.6(5),
paragraphs “a” to “c,” as
follows:
a. The supplier facility shall ensure
that the facility has an equipment quality assurance program specific to
mammography and covering all components of the system, to
ensure consistently high–quality images with minimum patient exposure.
Responsibility for the quality assurance program and for each of its
elements shall be assigned to individuals who are qualified for their
assignments and who shall be allowed adequate time to perform these
duties.
(1) Lead interpreting physician. The facility shall
identify a lead interpreting physician who shall have the general responsibility
of ensuring that the quality assurance program meets all requirements of these
rules. No other individual shall be assigned or shall retain responsibility for
quality assurance tasks unless the lead interpreting physician has determined
that the individual’s qualifications for, and performance of, the
assignment are adequate.
(2) Interpreting physicians. All interpreting physicians
interpreting mammograms for the facility shall:
1. Follow the facility procedures for corrective action
when the images they are asked to interpret are of poor quality,
and
2. Participate in the facility’s medical outcomes
audit program.
(3) Medical physicist. Each facility shall have the
services of a medical physicist available to survey mammography equipment and
oversee the equipment–related quality assurance practices of the facility.
At a minimum, the medical physicist(s) shall be responsible for performing the
surveys and mammography equipment evaluations and providing the facility with
the applicable reports.
(4) Quality control technologist. Responsibility for all
individual tasks within the quality assurance program not assigned to the lead
interpreting physician or the medical physicist shall be assigned to a quality
control technologist(s). The tasks are to be performed by the quality control
technologist or by other personnel qualified to perform the tasks. When other
personnel are utilized for these tasks, the quality control technologist shall
ensure that the tasks are completed in such a way as to meet the requirements of
41.6(5)“e” through “k.”
b. The supplier facility shall ensure
that a general review of the program is conducted at least annually and have
available the services of a qualified radiation medical
physicist who is capable of establishing and conducting the program.
c. Under the direction of the lead interpreting
physician consultant, the radiation
medical physicist shall have responsibility for establishing and
conducting the equipment quality assurance program. The program shall
include:
(1) to (3) No change.
ITEM 71. Amend subrule 41.6(5),
paragraph “h,” as follows:
h. Retake analysis program.
(1) A program shall be established as a further aid in
detecting and correcting problems affecting image quality or exposure.
(2) All retakes shall be logged including date,
technologist’s name and reason for retake. A retake analysis shall be
performed every 250 patients or quarterly, whichever comes first.
(3) If the total repeat or reject rate changes from the
previously determined rate by more than 2.0 percent of the total films included
in the analysis, the reason(s) for the change shall be determined. Any
corrective actions shall be recorded and the results of these corrective actions
shall be assessed.
ITEM 72. Amend subrule 41.6(5) as
follows:
Amend paragraph “i” as follows:
i. Medical outcomes audit. Each facility shall establish a
system for reviewing outcome data from all mammography performed, including
follow–up on the disposition of positive mammograms and correlation of
surgical biopsy results with mammogram reports. the
interpreting physician’s findings. This program shall be designed to
ensure the reliability, clarity, and accuracy of the interpretation of
mammograms.
(1) Analysis of these outcome data shall be made
individually and collectively for all interpreting physicians at the facility.
In addition, any cases of breast cancer among women imaged at the facility that
subsequently become known to the facility shall prompt the facility to
initiatefollow–up on surgical and pathology results, or both, and review
of the mammograms taken prior to the diagnosis of a malignancy. Responsibility
for each requirement for monitoring shall be assigned to qualified personnel and
documented in the facility’s records.
(2) Frequency of audit analysis. The facility’s
first audit analysis shall be initiated no later than 12 months after the date
the facility becomes certified, or 12 months after April 28, 1999, whichever
date is the latest. This audit analysis shall be completed within an additional
12 months to permit completion of diagnostic procedures and data collection.
Subsequent audit analyses will be conducted at least once every 12
months.
(3) Reviewing interpreting physician. Each facility shall
designate at least one interpreting physician to review the medical outcomes
audit data at least once every 12 months. This individual shall record the
dates of the audit period(s) and shall be responsible for analyzing results
based on this audit. This individual shall also be responsible for documenting
the results, notifying other interpreting physicians of the results and the
facility aggregate results. If follow–up actions are taken, the reviewing
interpreting physician shall also be responsible for documenting the nature of
the follow–up.
Rescind paragraph “j” and adopt the
following new paragraph in lieu thereof:
j. Quality assurance records. The lead interpreting
physician, quality control technologist, and medical physicist shall ensure that
records concerning employee qualifications to meet assigned quality assurance
tasks, mammography technique and procedures, quality control (including
monitoring data, problems detected by analysis of that data, corrective actions,
and the effectiveness of the corrective actions), safety, and protection are
properly maintained and updated. These quality control records shall be kept
for each test specified in these rules until the next annual inspection has been
completed and the facility is in compliance with the quality assurance
requirements or until the test has been performed two additional times at the
required frequency, whichever is longer.
Adopt new paragraphs “k” to
“o” as follows:
k. Quality assurance—equipment.
(1) Daily quality control tests. Film processors used to
develop mammograms shall be adjusted and maintained to meet the technical
development specifications for the mammography film in use. A processor
performance test shall be performed on each day that clinical films are
processed before any clinical films are processed that day. The test shall
include an assessment of base plus fog density, mid–density, and density
difference, using the mammography film used clinically at the
facility.
1. The base plus fog density shall be within plus 0.03 of the
established operating level.
2. The mid–density shall be within plus or minus 0.15 of
the established operating level.
3. The density difference shall be within plus or minus 0.15
of the established operating level.
(2) Weekly quality control tests. Facilities with
screen–film systems shall perform an image quality evaluation test, using
an FDA–approved phantom, at least weekly.
1. The optical density of the film at the center of an image
of a standard FDA–accepted phantom shall be at least 1.20 when exposed
under a typical clinical condition.
2. The optical density of the film at the center of the
phantom image shall not change by more than plus or minus 0.20 from the
established operating level.
3. The phantom image shall achieve at least the minimum score
established by the accreditation body and accepted by the FDA.
4. The density difference between the background of the
phantom and an added test object used to assess image contrast shall be measured
and shall not vary by more than plus or minus 0.05 from the established
operating level.
(3) Quarterly quality control tests. Facilities with
screen–film systems shall perform the following quality control tests at
least quarterly:
• Fixer retention in film.
The residual fixer shall be no more than 5 micrograms per square
centimeter.
(4) Semiannual quality control tests. Facilities with
screen–film systems shall perform the following quality control tests at
least semiannually:
1. Darkroom fog. The optical density attributable to darkroom
fog shall not exceed 0.05 when a mammography film of the type used in the
facility, which has a mid–density of no less than 1.2 OD, is exposed to
typical darkroom conditions for two minutes while such film is placed on the
countertop emulsion side up. If the darkroom has a safelight used for
mammography film, it shall be on during this test.
2. Screen–film contact. Testing for screen–film
contact shall be conducted using 40 mesh copper screen. All cassettes used in
the facility for mammography shall be tested.
3. Compression device performance. A compression force of at
least 25 pounds (111 newtons) for 15 seconds shall be provided. Effective
October 28, 2002, the maximum compression force for the initial power drive
shall be between 25 pounds (111 newtons) and 45 pounds (200 newtons).
(5) Annual quality control tests. Facilities with
screen–film systems shall perform the following quality control tests at
least annually:
1. Automatic exposure control (AEC) performance.
• The AEC shall be capable
of maintaining film optical density within plus or minus 0.30 of the mean
optical density when thickness of a homogeneous material is varied over a range
of 2 to 6 centimeters and the kVp is varied appropriately for such thicknesses
over the kVp range used clinically in the facility. If this requirement cannot
be met, a technique chart shall be developed showing appropriate techniques (kVp
and density control settings) for different breast thicknesses and compositions
that must be used so that optical densities within plus or minus 0.30 of the
average underphototimed conditions can be produced.
• After October 28, 2002,
the AEC shall be capable of maintaining film optical density (OD) within plus or
minus 0.15 of the mean optical density when thickness of a homogenous material
is varied over a range of 2 to 6 centimeters and the kVp is varied appropriately
for such thicknesses over the kVp range used clinically in the
facility.
• The optical density of the
film in the center of the phantom image shall not be less than 1.20.
2. kVp accuracy and reproducibility.
• The
kVp shall be accurate within plus or minus 5 percent of the indicated or
selected kVp at the lowest clinical kVp that can be measured by a kVp test
device, the most commonly used clinical kVp, and the highest available clinical
kVp.
• At the most commonly used
clinical settings of kVp, the coefficient of variation of reproducibility of the
kVp shall be equal to or less than 0.02.
3. Focal spot condition. Until October 28, 2002, focal spot
condition shall be evaluated either by determining system resolution or by
measuring focal spot dimensions. On and after October 28, 2002, facilities
shall evaluate focal spot condition only by determining the system
resolution.
• Each X–ray system
used for mammography, in combination with the mammography screen–film
combination used in the facility, shall provide a minimum resolution of 11
cycles/millimeters (mm) (line–pairs/mm) when a high contrast resolution
bar test pattern is oriented with the bars perpendicular to the
anode–cathode axis, and a minimum resolution of 13 line–pairs/mm
when the bars are parallel to that axis.
• The bar pattern shall be
placed 4.5 centimeters above the breast support surface, centered with respect
to the chest wall edge of the image receptor, and with the edge of the pattern
within 1 centimeter of the chest wall edge of the image receptor.
• When more than one target
material is provided, the measurement above shall be made using the appropriate
focal spot for each target material.
• When more than one SID is
provided, the test shall be performed at the SID most commonly used
clinically.
• Test kVp shall be set at
the value used clinically by the facility for a standard breast and shall be
performed in the AEC mode, if available. If necessary, a suitable absorber may
be placed in the beam to increase exposure times. The screen–film
cassette combination used by the facility shall be used to test for this
requirement and shall be placed in the normal location used for clinical
procedures.
• Focal spot dimensions.
Measured values of the focal spot length (dimension parallel to the
anode–cathode axis) and width (dimension perpendicular to the
anode–cathode axis) shall be within tolerance limits specified in Table
1.
Table 1
Focal Spot Tolerance Limit
Nominal Focal Spot Size (mm)
|
Maximum Measured Dimensions Width (mm)
|
Length (mm)
|
0.10
|
0.15
|
0.15
|
0.15
|
0.23
|
0.23
|
0.20
|
0.30
|
0.30
|
0.30
|
0.45
|
0.65
|
0.40
|
0.60
|
0.85
|
0.60
|
0.90
|
1.30
|
4. Beam quality and half–value layer (HVL). The HVL
shall meet the specification of 41.1(4) and 41.1(6) for the minimum HVL. These
values, extrapolated to the mammographic range, are shown in Table 2. Values
not shown in Table 2 may be determined by linear interpolation or
extrapolation.
Table 2
X–ray Tube Voltage (kilovolt peak) and Minimum HVL
Designed Operating Range (kV) Below 50
|
Measured Operating Voltage (kV)
|
Minimum HVL (millimeters of aluminum)
|
20
|
0.20
|
25
|
0.25
|
30
|
0.30
|
5. Breast entrance air kerma and AEC reproducibility. The
coefficient of variation for both air kerma and mAs shall not exceed
0.05.
6. Dosimetry. The average glandular dose delivered during a
single cranio–caudal view of an FDA–accepted phantom simulating a
standard breast shall not exceed 0.3 rad (3.0 milligray (mGy)) per exposure.
The dose shall be determined with technique factors and conditions used
clinically for a standard breast.
7. X–ray field/light field/image receptor/compression
paddle alignment.
• All systems shall have
beam–limiting devices that allow the entire chest wall edge of the
X–ray field to extend to the chest wall edge of the image receptor and
provide means to ensure that the X–ray field does not extend beyond any
edge of the image receptor by more than 2 percent of the SID.
• The chest wall edge of the
compression paddle shall not extend beyond the chest wall edge of the image
receptor by more than 1 percent of the SID when tested with the compression
paddle placed above the breast support surface at a distance equivalent to
standard breast thickness. The shadow of the vertical edge of the compression
paddle shall not be visible on the image.
8. Uniformity of screen speed. Uniformity of screen speed of
all the cassettes in the facility shall be tested and the difference between the
maximum and minimum optical densities shall not exceed 0.30. Screen artifacts
shall also be evaluated during this test.
9. System artifacts. System artifacts shall be evaluated with
a high–grade, defect–free sheet of homogeneous material large enough
to cover the mammography cassette and shall be performed for all cassette sizes
used in the facility using a grid appropriate for the cassette size being
tested. System artifacts shall also be evaluated for all available focal spot
sizes and target filter combinations used clinically.
10. Radiation output.
• The system shall be
capable of producing a minimum output of 513 milliRoentgen (mR) per second (4.5
mGy air kerma per second) when operating at 28 kVp in the standard mammography
(moly/moly) mode at any SID where the system is designed to operate and when
measured by a detector with its center located 4.5 centimeters above the breast
support surface with the compression paddle in place between the source and the
detector. After October 28, 2002, the system, under the same measuring
conditions, shall be capable of producing a minimum output of 800 mR per second
(7.0 mGy air kerma per second) when operating at 28 kVp in the standard
(moly/moly) mammography mode at any SID where the system is designed to
operate.
• The system shall be
capable of maintaining the required minimum radiation output averaged over a 3.0
second period.
11. Decompression. If the system is equipped with a provision
for automatic decompression after completion of an exposure or interruption of
power to the system, the system shall be tested to confirm that it
provides:
• An override capability to
allow maintenance of compression;
• A continuous display of
the override status; and
• A manual emergency
compression release that can be activated in the event of power or automatic
release failure.
(6) Quality control tests—other modalities. For systems
with image receptor modalities other than screen–film, the quality
assurance program shall be substantially the same as the quality assurance
program recommended by the image receptor manufacturer, except that the maximum
allowable dose shall not exceed the maximum allowable dose for screen–film
systems in 41.6(5)“k”(5)“6.”
(7) Use of test results.
1. After completion of the tests specified in
41.6(5)“k,” the facility shall compare the test results to the
corresponding specified action limits; or, for non–screen–film
modalities, to the manufacturer’s recommended action limits; or, for
post–move, preexamination testing of mobile units, to the limits
established in the test method used by the facility.
2. If the test results fall outside of the action limits, the
source of the problem shall be identified, and corrective actions shall be
taken:
• Before any further
examinations are performed or any films are processed using the component of the
mammography system that failed the test, if the failed test was that described
in 41.6(5)“k”(1), (2), (4)“1” to (4)“3,”
(5)“6,” and (6);
• Within 30 days of the test
date for all other tests described in 41.6(5)“k.”
(8) Surveys.
1. At least once a year, each facility shall undergo a survey
by a medical physicist or by an individual under the direct supervision of a
medical physicist. At a minimum, this survey shall include the performance of
tests to ensure that the facility meets the quality assurance requirements of
the annual tests described in 41.6(5)“k”(5) and (6), the weekly
phantom image quality test described in 41.6(5)“k”(2) and the
quarterly retake analysis results described in 41.6(5)“h.”
2. The results of all tests conducted by the facility in
accordance with 41.6(5)“k”(1) through (7), as well as written
documentation of any corrective actions taken and their results, shall be
evaluated for adequacy by the medical physicist performing the survey.
3. The medical physicist shall prepare a survey report that
includes a summary of this review and recommendations for necessary
improvements.
4. The survey report shall be sent to the facility within 30
days of the date of the survey.
5. The survey report shall be dated and signed by the medical
physicist performing or supervising the survey. If the survey was performed
entirely or in part by another individual under the direct supervision of the
medical physicist, that individual and the part of the survey that individual
performed shall also be identified in the survey report.
(9) Mammography equipment evaluations. Additional evaluations
of mammography units or image processors shall be conducted whenever a new unit
or processor is installed, a unit or processor is disassembled and reassembled
at the same or a new location, or major components of a mammography unit or
processor equipment are changed or repaired. These evaluations shall be used
to determine whether the new or changed equipment meets the requirements of
applicable standards in 41.6(5) and 41.6(6). All problems shall be corrected
before the new or changed equipment is put into service for examinations or film
processing. The mammography equipment evaluation shall be performed by a
medical physicist or by an individual under the direct supervision of an
Iowa–approved medical physicist.
(10) Facility cleanliness.
1. The facility shall establish and implement adequate
protocols for maintaining darkroom, screen, and viewbox cleanliness.
2. The facility shall document that all cleaning procedures
are performed at the frequencies specified in the protocols.
(11) Calibration of air kerma measuring instruments.
Instruments used by medical physicists in their annual survey to measure the air
kerma or air kerma rate from a mammography unit shall be calibrated at least
once every two years and each time the instrument is repaired. The instrument
calibration must be traceable to a national standard and calibrated with an
accuracy of plus or minus 6 percent (95 percent confidence level) in the
mammography energy range.
(12) Infection control. Facilities shall establish and comply
with a system specifying procedures to be followed by the facility for cleaning
and disinfecting mammography equipment after contact with blood or other
potentially infectious materials. This system shall specify the methods for
documenting facility compliance with the infection control procedures
established and shall:
1. Comply with all applicable federal, state, and local
regulations pertaining to infection control; and
2. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures
for the cleaning and disinfecting of the mammography equipment used in the
facility; or
3. If adequate manufacturer’s recommendations are not
available, comply with generally accepted guidance on infection control, until
such recommendations become available.
l. Mammography procedures and techniques for mammography of
patients with breast implants.
(1) Each facility shall have a procedure to inquire whether or
not the patient has breast implants prior to the actual mammographic
examination.
(2) Except where contraindicated, or unless modified by a
physician’s directions, patients with breast implants undergoing
mammography shall have mammographic views to maximize the visualization of
breast tissue.
m. Consumer complaint mechanism. Each facility
shall:
(1) Establish a written and documented system for collecting
and resolving consumer complaints;
(2) Maintain a record of each serious complaint received by
the facility for at least three years from the date the complaint was
received;
(3) Provide the consumer with adequate directions for filing
serious complaints with the facility’s accreditation body and any other
appropriate regulatory entity if the facility is unable to resolve a serious
complaint to the consumer’s satisfaction.
(4) Report unresolved serious complaints to the accreditation
body in a manner and time frame specified by the accreditation body.
n. Clinical image quality. Clinical images produced by any
certified facility must continue to comply with the standards for clinical image
quality established by that facility’s accreditation body.
o. Additional mammography review and patient
notification.
(1) If the agency believes that mammography quality at a
facility has been compromised and may present a serious risk to human health,
the facility shall provide clinical images and other relevant information, as
specified by the agency, for review by the accreditation body or other entity
designated by the agency. This additional mammography review will help the
agency to determine whether the facility is in compliance with rule
641—41.6(136C) and, if not, whether there is a need to notify affected
patients, their physicians, or the public that the reliability, clarity, and
accuracy of interpretation of mammograms has been compromised.
(2) If the agency determines that any activity related to the
provision of mammography at a facility may present a serious risk to human
health such that patient notification is necessary, the facility shall notify
patients or their designees, their physicians, or the public of action that may
be taken to minimize the effects of the risk. Such notification shall occur
within a time frame and a manner specified by the agency.
ITEM 73. Amend subrule 41.6(6) as
follows:
41.6(6) Equipment standards. The equipment used to
perform mammography shall meet the following standards:
a. Design: Be specifically designed for mammography.
This prohibits systems that have been modified or equipped with special
attachments for mammography.
b. Performance standards: Meet the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) performance standards for diagnostic X–ray systems
and their major components found in 21 CFR 1020.30 and FDA standards for
radiographic equipment in 21 CFR 1020.31.
c. Image receptor systems: Have image receptor systems
and individual components which are appropriate for mammography and used
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
(1) Systems using screen–film image receptors shall
provide, at a minimum, for operation for image receptors of 18 ± 24
centimeters and 24 ± 30 centimeters.
(2) Systems using screen–film image receptors shall
be equipped with moving grids matched to all image receptor sizes
provided.
(3) Systems used for magnification procedures shall be
capable of operation with the grid removed from between the source and image
receptor.
d. Have beam limitation which limits the useful beam
so that the X–ray field at the plane of the image receptor does not extend
beyond any edge of the image receptor at any designated source to image receptor
distance (SID). However, the X–ray field may extend beyond the edge of
the image receptor which is adjacent to the chest wall provided it does not
extend beyond this edge by more than 2 percent of the SID.
d. Light fields: For any system with a light beam that
passes through the X–ray beam–limiting device, the light shall
provide an average illumination of not less than 160 lux (15 foot candles) at
100 centimeters or the maximum source–image receptor distance (SID),
whichever is less.
e. Magnification:
(1) Systems used to perform noninterventional
problem–solving procedures shall have radiographic magnification
capability available for use by the operator.
(2) Systems used for magnification procedures shall
provide, at a minimum, at least one magnification value within the range of 1.4
to 2.0.
f. Tube–image receptor assembly:
(1) The assembly shall be capable of being fixed in any
position where it is designed to operate. Once fixed in any such position, it
shall not undergo unintended motion.
(2) The mechanism ensuring compliance with this subrule
shall not fail in the event of power interruption.
e g. Check
Film/screen contact: Shall check film/screen contact when cassettes are
first placed into use and semiannually thereafter.
f. Have limits to provide kV–target–filter
combinations appropriate for the image receptors which have met the requirements
of 41.6(6)“c.”
g h. Focal spot: The focal
spot size, magnification factor and source to image receptor distance (SID)
are shall be appropriate for mammography and in the
ranges shown below:
SID
|
Nominal Focal Spot Size
|
>65 cm
|
< or = to 0.6 mm
|
50 to 65 cm
|
< or = to 0.5 mm
|
< or = to 50 cm
|
< or = to 0.4 mm
|
(1) When more than one focal spot is provided, the system
shall indicate, prior to exposure, which focal spot is selected.
(2) When more than one target material is provided, the
system shall indicate, prior to exposure, the preselected target
material.
(3) When the target material or focal spot, or both, is
selected by a system algorithm that is based on the exposure or on a test
exposure, the system shall display, after the exposure, the target material or
focal spot, or both, actually used during the exposure.
h i. Devices.
Compression devices: Shall have compression devices parallel to the
imaging plane shall be available and able to immobilize
and compress the breast with a force of at least 25 pounds per square inch and
shall be capable of maintaining this compression for at least three seconds.
Effective October 28, 2002, each system shall provide:
(1) An initial power–driven compression activated by
hands–free controls operable from both sides of the patient;
and
(2) Fine adjustment compression controls operable from both
sides of the patient.
(3) Systems shall be equipped with different sized
compression paddles that match the sizes of all full field image receptors
provided for the system. Compression paddles for special purposes, including
those smaller than the full size of the image receptor (for “spot
compression”), may be provided. Such compression paddles for special
purposes are not subject to 41.6(6)“i”(6) and (7).
(4) Except as provided in 41.6(6)“i”(5), the
compression paddle shall be flat and parallel to the breast support table and
shall not deflect from parallel by more than 1.0 cm at any point on the surface
of the compression paddle when compression is applied.
(5) Equipment intended by the manufacturer’s design
not to be flat and parallel to the breast support table during compression shall
meet the manufacturer’s design specifications and maintenance
requirements.
(6) The chest wall edge of the compression paddle shall be
straight and parallel to the edge of the image receptor.
(7) The chest wall edge may be bent upward to allow for
patient comfort but shall not appear on the image.
i j. Grids: Shall have the
capability for using antiscatter grids.
j. Shall have the capability of automatic exposure
control.
k. AEC: Shall have automatic exposure control such
that:
(1) Each screen–film system shall provide an AEC mode
that is operable in all combinations of equipment configuration provided, e.g.,
grid, nongrid; magnification, nonmagnification; and various target–filter
combinations.
(2) The positioning or selection of the detector shall
permit flexibility in the placement of the detector under the target
tissue.
• The size and
available positions of the detector shall be clearly indicated at the
X–ray input surface of the breast compression paddle.
• The selected
position of the detector shall be clearly indicated.
(3) The system shall provide means for the operator to vary
the selected optical density from the normal (zero) setting.
k l. Control panel: Shall have
a control panel that:
(1) Gives a positive indication when X–rays are being
produced.
(2) Gives an audible signal indicating termination of
exposure.
(3) Includes labeled control settings or appropriate
indications that show the physical factors used for exposure such as kilovoltage
potential (kVp), milliampere seconds (mAs), exposure time, and whether exposure
termination is automatic.
(3) Has manual selection of milliampere seconds (mAs) or at
least one of its component parts (milliampere (mA) or time, or
both).
(4) Has the technique factors (peak tube potential in
kilovolts (kV) and either tube current in mA and exposure time in seconds or the
product of tube current and exposure time in mAs) to be used during an exposure
indicated before the exposure begins, except when AEC is used, in which case the
technique factors that are set prior to the exposure shall be
indicated.
(5) Has a system that, following AEC mode use, shall
indicate the actual kilovoltage peak (kVp) and mAs used during the
exposure.
l m. mAs: Shall indicate, or
provide a means of determining, the mAs resulting from each exposure made with
automatic exposure control.
m n. The viewbox shall
be Viewboxes: Shall have a viewbox that is checked periodically
to ensure optimal conditions. When the mammogram is placed on the viewbox, the
area surrounding the film must be masked to exclude extraneous light which may
reduce image contrast.
n. Mobile units and vans.
(1) A phantom image shall be made and processed after
each relocation.
(2) If processing is not available, a check of the
radiation output shall be made.
Equipment shall be recalibrated as necessary to
maintain quality of phantom image.
o. X–ray film: Shall use X–ray film that has
been designated by the film manufacturer as appropriate for mammography and that
is matched to the screen’s spectral output as specified by the
manufacturer.
p. Intensifying screens: Shall use intensifying screens
that have been designated by the screen manufacturer as appropriate for
mammography.
q. Chemicals: Shall use chemical solutions for processing
mammography films that are capable of developing the films in a manner
equivalent to the minimum requirements specified by the film
manufacturer.
r. Hot–lights: Shall make special lights for film
illumination, i.e., hot–lights, capable of producing light levels greater
than that provided by the viewbox, available to the interpreting
physicians.
s. Masking devices: Shall ensure that film masking devices
that can limit the illuminated area to a region equal to or smaller than the
exposed portion of the film are available to all interpreting physicians
interpreting for the facility.
t. Mobile units and vans.
(1) A phantom image shall be produced, processed, and
evaluated after each relocation.
(2) If processing is not available, a check of the
radiation output shall be made and compared to a preset standard for quality.
Equipment shall be recalibrated as necessary to maintain quality of phantom
image.
ITEM 74. Rescind
641—41.6(136C), Appendix I.
ITEM 75. Amend subrule 41.7(1),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
41.7(1) Definitions. In addition to the definitions
provided in rule rules 641—38.2(136C),
641—40.2(136C), and 641—41.1(136C), the following definitions
are applicable to this rule.
ITEM 76. Amend
641-Chapter 41, Appendix
B,“3,” as follows:
3. X–ray control placement:
The X–ray control for the system shall be fixed within
the booth; and
(a) Shall be at least 40 inches (1.02 m) from any point
subject to direct scatter, leakage or primary beam radiation.
(b) Shall allow the operator to use the majority of the
available viewing windows or mirrors.
ITEM 77. Amend subrule 42.2(2) by
adopting new paragraph “f”:
f. Performing procedures not allowed under the
individual’s current certification.
ITEM 78. Amend subparagraph
42.3(1)“a”(7) as follows:
(7) Clinical experience sufficient to demonstrate competency
in the application of the above as specified in the revised 1990 edition
of the “Essentials and Guidelines of an Accredited Educational Program for
the Radiographer” of the American Medical Association’s Committee on
Allied Health Education and Accreditation.
“Standards for an Accredited Education Program in
Radiologic Sciences” as adopted by the Joint Review Committee on Education
on Radiologic Technology.
ITEM 79. Amend subrule 45.1(2) as
follows:
Rescind the following definition:
“Permanent radiographic installation”
means a shielded installation or structure designed or intended for performing
enclosed radiography, not located at a temporary job site, and in which
radiography is performed.
Adopt the following new definitions in
alphabetical order:
“Annual refresher safety training” means a review
conducted or provided by the licensee for its employees on radiation safety
aspects of industrial radiography. The review may include, as appropriate, the
results of internal inspections, new procedures or equipment, new or revised
regulations, accidents or errors that have been observed, and should also
provide opportunities for employees to ask safety questions.
“Associated equipment” means equipment that is
used in conjunction with a radiographic exposure device to make radiographic
exposures that drives, guides, or comes in contact with the source, e.g., guide
tube, control tube, control (drive) cable, removable source stop,
“J” tube and collimator when it is used as an exposure
head.
“Certifying entity” means an independent
certifying organization meeting the requirements in Appendix E of this chapter
or Agreement State meeting the requirements of Appendix E or the requirements of
Appendix A in 10 CFR Part 34.
“Control (drive) cable” means the cable that is
connected to the source assembly and used to drive the source to and from the
exposure location.
“Control drive mechanism” means a device that
enables the source assembly to be moved to and from the exposure
device.
“Control tube” means a protective sheath for
guiding the control cable. The control tube connects the control drive
mechanism to the radiographic exposure device.
“Exposure head” means a device that locates the
gamma radiography sealed source in the selected working position. (An exposure
head is also known as a source stop.)
“Field station” means a facility where licensed
material may be stored or used and from which equipment is dispatched.
“Guide tube (projection sheath)” means a flexible
or rigid tube (i.e., “J” tube) for guiding the source assembly and
the attached control cable from the exposure device to the exposure head. The
guide tube may also include the connections necessary for attachment to the
exposure device and to the exposure head.
“Hands–on experience” means experience in
all of those areas considered to be directly involved in the radiography
process.
“Independent certifying organization” means an
independent organization that meets all of the criteria of Appendix E to this
chapter.
“Permanent radiographic installation” means an
enclosed shielded room, cell, or vault, not located at a temporary job site, in
which radiography is performed.
“Practical examination” means a demonstration
through practical application of the safety rules and principles in industrial
radiography including use of all appropriate equipment and procedures.
“Radiographer certification” means written
approval received from a certifying entity stating that an individual has
satisfactorily met certain established radiation safety, testing, and experience
criteria.
“Radiographic operations” means all activities
associated with the presence of radioactive sources in a radiographic exposure
device during use of the device or transport (except when being transported by a
common or contract transport), to include surveys to confirm the adequacy of
boundaries, setting up equipment and any activity inside restricted area
boundaries.
“S–tube” means a tube through which the
radioactive source travels when inside a radiographic exposure device.
Amend the following definitions:
“Shielded position” means the location within the
radiographic exposure device or storage container which, by
manufacturer’s design, is the proper location for the sealed source during
storage source changer where the sealed source is secured and
restricted from movement.
“Source assembly” means a component to
which the sealed source is affixed or in which the sealed source is contained.
The source assembly includes the sealed source (pigtail) an assembly
that consists of the sealed source and a connector that attaches the source to
the control cable. The source assembly may also include a stop ball used to
secure the source in the shielded position.
ITEM 80. Amend subrule 45.1(5),
paragraph “c,” as follows:
c. Records of these calibrations shall be maintained for
two three years after the calibration date for
inspection by the agency.
ITEM 81. Amend subrule 45.1(7) as
follows:
45.1(7) Utilization logs.
a. Each licensee or registrant shall maintain
current logs of the use of each sealed source of
radiation. The logs shall include:
(1) A unique identification, such as which
includes the make, model and a serial number of
each radiation machine, of each radiographic exposure device
containing a sealed source, and each sealed source;
(2) The identity of the radiographer using the sealed
source of radiation;
(3) Locations where each sealed source of
radiation is used; and
(4) The date(s) each sealed source of
radiation is removed from storage and returned to storage. For
fixed installations, the date(s) each source of radiation is energized or used
and the number of exposures made.
b. Each registrant shall maintain current logs of the use
of each source of radiation. The logs shall include:
(1) A unique identification, which includes the make, model
and serial number of each source of radiation;
(2) The identity of the radiographer using the source of
radiation;
(3) The date(s) each source of radiation is energized or
used and the number of exposures made.
b c. Utilization logs may be kept on
IDPH Form 588–2693, Utilization Log, or on clear, legible records
containing all the information required by
45.1(7)“a.” or “b.” Copies of
utilization logs shall be maintained for agency inspection for
two three years from the date of the recorded event.
The rec–ords shall be kept at the location specified by the license or
certificate of registration.
ITEM 82. Amend subrule 45.1(9),
paragraph “b,” as follows:
b. The control device or alarm system shall be tested for
proper operation at the beginning of each day of equipment use. If a control
device or alarm system is operating improperly, it shall be immediately labeled
as defective and repaired before industrial radiographic operations are resumed.
Rec–ords of these tests shall be maintained for inspection by the agency
for two three years from the date of the
event.
ITEM 83. Rescind
45.1(10)“b”(1)“2” and adopt the following
new numbered paragraph “2” in lieu
thereof:
2. Has completed on–the–job training as a
radiographic trainee supervised by one or more radiographic trainers. The
on–the–job training shall be documented on the appropriate agency
form or equivalent and shall include a minimum of two months (320 hours) of
active participation in the performance of industrial radiography utilizing
radioactive material or one month (160 hours) of active participation in the
performance of industrial radiography utilizing radiation machines, or both.
Individuals performing industrial radiography utilizing radioactive materials
and radiation machines must complete both segments of the on–the–job
training (three months or 480 hours). Active participation does not include
safety meetings or classroom training;
ITEM 84. Amend subrule 45.1(10),
paragraph “d,” introductory paragraph, as follows:
d. Radiation safety officer. The radiation safety officer
shall ensure that radiation safety activities are being performed in accordance
with approved procedures and regulatory requirements in the daily operation of
the licensee’s program.
ITEM 85. Amend
45.1(10)“g”(1)“1” as follows:
1. An I.D. card shall be issued to each person who
successfully completes the requirements of 45.1(10)“b” and the
examination prescribed in 45.1(10)“f”(2) or an equivalent
exam examination. Certification by a certifying
entity in accordance with 10 CFR 34.43(a)(1) meets the examination requirements
of 45.1(10)“f”(2) but not the requirements of
45.1(10)“b”(1).
ITEM 86. Rescind subrule 45.1(11) and
adopt the following new subrule in lieu thereof:
45.1(11) Internal audits. Except as provided in
45.1(11)“c,” the RSO or designee shall conduct an inspection program
of the job performance of each radiographer and radiographer trainee to ensure
that these rules, license requirements, and the licensee’s or
registrant’s operating and emergency procedures are followed. The
inspection program must:
a. Include observation of the performance of each radiographer
and radiographer trainee during an actual industrial radiographic operation, at
intervals not to exceed six months; and
b. Provide that, if a radiographer or radiographer trainee has
not participated in an industrial radiographic operation for more than six
months since the last audit, the radiographer or radiographer trainee must
demonstrate understanding of the subjects contained in Appendix A of this
chapter by a practical examination before the individual can next participate in
a radiographic operation.
c. The agency may consider alternatives in those situations
where the individual serves as both radiographer and RSO.
d. Records of audits shall be maintained by the licensee or
registrant for agency inspection for three years from the date of the
audit.
ITEM 87. Amend paragraph
45.1(12)“b” as follows:
b. When performing industrial radiographic
operations:
(1) No licensee or registrant shall permit an individual to
act as a radiographer, radiographer trainee, or radiographer trainer unless
at all times during radiographic operations the
each individual wears, on the trunk of the body, a combination of
a direct–reading pocket dosimeter, an operating
alarm ratemeter, and either a film badge, an optically
stimulated device (OSD) or a thermoluminescent dosimeter (TLD) at
all times during the radiographic operations. For permanent
radiographic installations where other appropriate alarming or warning devices
are in routine use, the wearing of an alarm ratemeter is not required.
(2) Pocket dosimeters or electronic personal dosimeters
shall meet the criteria in ANSI N322–1977 and shall have a range of zero
to at least 200 milliroentgens.
(3) Pocket dosimeters or electronic personal dosimeters
shall be recharged at the start of each work shift.
(4) Pocket dosimeters or electronic personal dosimeters
shall be read and exposures recorded at least once daily, at the end of each
work shift, and before each recharging.
(5) If an individual’s pocket dosimeter is discharged
beyond its range (i.e., goes “off scale”), or if the electronic
personal dosimeter reads greater than 200 millirem (2 millisievert), and the
possibility of radiation exposure cannot be ruled out as the cause,
industrial radiographic operations by that individual shall cease and the
individual’s film badge or TLD shall be within 24 hours sent for
processing. The individual shall not return to work with sources of radiation
until a determination of the radiation exposure has been made. This
determination must be made by the RSO or the RSO’s designee. The results
of this determination must be included in the exposure records maintained in
accordance with 641—Chapter 40.
(6) Each film badge, OSD or TLD shall be assigned to
and worn by only one individual.
(7) Film badges, OSDs and TLDs must be replaced at
least monthly. After replacement, each film badge, OSD or TLD must be
returned to the supplier for processing within 14 calendar days of the exchange
date specified by the personnel monitoring supplier.
(8) If a film badge, OSD or TLD is lost or damaged, the
worker shall cease work immediately until a replacement film badge, OSD
or TLD is provided and the exposure is calculated for the time period from
issuance to loss or damage of the film badge, OSD or TLD.
ITEM 88. Amend subrule 45.1(13) as
follows:
45.1(13) Supervision of radiographer trainee.
Whenever a radiographer trainee uses radiographic exposure devices, sealed
sources or related source handling tools or conducts radiation surveys required
by 45.2(5) or 45.3(7) to determine that the sealed source has returned to the
shielded position after an exposure, the radiographer trainee shall be under the
personal supervision of a radiographer instructor. The personal supervision
must include:
a. The radiographer’s physical presence at the site
where the source(s) of radiation is being used;
b. The availability of the radiographer to give immediate
assistance if required; and
c. The radiographer’s direct observation of the
trainee’s performance of the operations referred to in this
subrule.
ITEM 89. Rescind subrule 45.3(1)
and adopt the following new subrule in lieu thereof:
45.3(1) Limits on external radiation levels from
storage containers and source changers. The maximum exposure rate limits for
storage containers and source changers are 200 millirem (2 millisieverts) per
hour at any exterior surface, and 10 millirem (0.1 millisievert) per hour at 1
meter from any exterior surface with the sealed source in the shielded
position.
ITEM 90. Amend subrule 45.3(2),
paragraph “a,” as follows:
a. Each source of radiation shall be provided with a lock or
lockable outer container designed to prevent unauthorized or accidental removal
or exposure of a sealed source and shall be kept locked and, if applicable,
the key removed, at all times except when under the direct surveillance of a
radiographer or radiographer trainee, or as may be otherwise authorized pursuant
to 45.3(6). Each storage container and source changer likewise shall be
provided with a lock and shall be kept locked when containing sealed sources
except when the container is under the direct surveillance of a radiographer or
radiographer trainee.
ITEM 91. Amend subparagraph
45.3(4)“c”(5) as follows:
(5) The guide tube must have passed the crushing tests
for the control tube as specified in ANSI N432 and a kinking resistance test
that closely approximates the kinking forces likely to be encountered during
use be able to withstand a crushing test that closely approximates
the crushing forces that are likely to be encountered during use, and be able to
withstand a kinking resistance test that closely approximates the kinking forces
that are likely to be encountered during use;
ITEM 92. Amend subparagraph
45.3(4)“c”(8) as follows:
(8) The guide tube exposure head connection must be able to
withstand the tensile test for control units specified in ANSI
N432–1980;
ITEM 93. Amend subrule 45.3(4) by
adopting new paragraphs “f” and
“g” as follows:
f. Notwithstanding the requirements of 45.3(4)“a,”
equipment used in industrial radiographic operations need not comply with §
8.9.2(c) of the Endurance Test in American National Standards Institute
N432–1980, if the prototype equipment has been tested using a torque value
representative of the torque that an individual using the radiography equipment
can realistically exert on the lever or crankshaft of the drive
mechanism.
g. Engineering analysis may be submitted by an applicant or
licensee to demonstrate the applicability of previously performed testing on
similar individual radiography equipment components. Upon review, the agency
may find this an acceptable alternative to actual testing of the component
pursuant to the above–referenced standard.
ITEM 94. Rescind paragraph
45.3(5)“b” and adopt the following new
paragraph in lieu thereof:
b. Leak testing.
(1) Each sealed source shall be tested for leakage at
intervals not to exceed 6 months. In the absence of a certificate from a
transferor indicating that a test has been made within the 6–month period
prior to the transfer, the sealed source shall not be put into use until
tested.
(2) Each exposure device using depleted uranium (DU) shielding
and an S–tube configuration must be tested for DU contamination at
intervals not to exceed 12 months. Should the leak test reveal that the
S–tube is worn through, the device may not be used again. DU shielded
devices do not have to be tested for DU contamination while in storage and not
in use. Before using or transferring such a device, however, the device must be
tested for DU contamination if the interval of storage exceeded 12
months.
ITEM 95. Amend paragraph
45.3(6)“a,” subparagraphs (9) and (10), and
adopt new subparagraphs (11) and (12) as
follows:
(9) Maintenance of records; and
(10) The inspection and maintenance of radiographic exposure
devices, source changers, storage containers, and radiation
machines.;
(11) The procedure(s) for identifying and reporting
defects and noncompliance in 10 CFR Part 21; and
(12) Source recovery procedure if the licensee will perform
source recovery.
ITEM 96. Amend subrule 45.3(6),
paragraph “c,” as follows:
c. Each licensee shall provide, as a minimum, two
radiographic personnel when sources of radiation are used for any industrial
radiography conducted other than at a permanent radiographic installation
(shielded room, bay, bunker). Whenever radiography is performed at a
location other than a permanent radiographic installation, the radiographer must
be accompanied by at least one other qualified radi–ographer or a
radiographer trainee. If one of the personnel is a radiographer trainee,
the other shall be a radiographer trainer authorized by the license. The
additional qualified individual shall observe the operations and be capable of
providing immediate assistance to prevent unauthorized entry. Except for the
situation of a radiographer trainer with a trainee, radiography shall not be
performed if only one qualified individual is present.
ITEM 97. Amend subrule 45.3(7),
paragraph “b,” as follows:
b. A survey with a calibrated and operable radiation survey
instrument shall be made after each radiographic exposure to determine that the
sealed source has been returned to its shielded position. The entire
circumference of the radiographic exposure device shall be surveyed. If the
radiographic exposure device has a source guide tube, the survey shall also
include the entire length of the guide tube and collimator. The survey
required by this subrule must be done before exchanging films, repositioning the
exposure head or dismantling the equipment.
ITEM 98. Amend subrule 45.3(9),
paragraph “a,” as follows:
a. Underwater, offshore platform, or lay–barge
radiography shall not be performed unless specifically authorized in a license
issued by the agency in accordance with 45.3(11).
641—paragraph 39.4(27)“e.”
ITEM 99. Rescind and reserve subrule
45.3(11).
ITEM 100. Amend subrule 45.4(2),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
45.4(2) Definitions. For purposes of this subrule,
definitions in 641—Chapter Chapters 38 and 40
and subrule 45.1(2) may also apply. As used in this rule, the following
definitions apply:
ITEM 101. Amend subrule 45.4(2) by
adopting the following new definition in alphabetical
order:
“Cold pasteurization” means the process of using
radiation for destroying disease–causing microorganisms in commercial
products.
ITEM 102. Amend subrule 45.4(11),
paragraph “c,” as follows:
c. Accelerator facilities registered pursuant to
45.4(3)“a” shall survey for removable contamination at intervals not
to exceed three six months to determine the degree of
contamination.
ITEM 103. Amend rule
641-46.1(136D), first unnumbered
paragraph, as follows:
All references to Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this
chapter are those in effect as of July 1, 1999 May 10,
2000.
ITEM 104. Amend subrule 46.5(1),
paragraph “c,” introductory paragraph, as follows:
c. A tanning facility shall provide each consumer with a
written warning statement prior to the consumer’s initial exposure and
annually thereafter which includes at least the following
information:
[Filed 3/15/00, effective 5/10/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
ARC 9755A
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation, on March 7, 2000, adopted amendments
to Chapter 452, “Flashing Lights and Warning Devices on Slow–Moving
Vehicles,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the January 26, 2000, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
9622A.
These amendments delete two obsolete rules and adopt a new
rule providing standards for an alternative reflective device for use on
horse– or mule–drawn vehicles. 1999 Iowa Acts, chapter 102, section
2 [Iowa Code Supplement section 321.383(2)], provides that an alternative
reflective device may be used if the individual operating the horse– or
mule–drawn vehicle objects for religious reasons to using a reflective
device that complies with the standards of the American Society of Agricultural
Engineers. The alternative reflective device must be in compliance with rules
adopted by the Department.
The new rule provides for an alternative reflective device of
one–inch–wide reflective strips that outline the rear of the
vehicle. This new rule does not provide a waiver. Rather, the rule implements
a statutory waiver.
The Department received comments both for and against the
alternative reflective device. Those in opposition did not believe that an
alternative reflective device should be allowed. This is a legislative, not a
rule–making, issue.
One person felt that the alternative reflective device
proposed by the Department is not adequate. The Department disagrees.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code
Supplement section 321.383(2).
These amendments will become effective May 10, 2000.
Rule–making actions:
ITEM 1. Amend the title of
761—Chapter 452 as follows:
FLASHING LIGHTS AND WARNING
REFLECTIVE DEVICES ON SLOW–MOVING VEHICLES
ITEM 2. Rescind and reserve rules
761—452.1(321) and 761—452.2(321).
ITEM 3. Adopt the following
new rule:
761—452.3(321) Alternative reflective device.
If a person operating a vehicle drawn by a horse or mule objects for religious
reasons to using a reflective device that complies with the standards of the
American Society of Agricultural Engineers, the vehicle may be identified by an
alternative reflective device that is in compliance with the
following:
452.3(1) The alternative reflective device shall
consist of one–inch–wide strips applied to the rear of the vehicle.
The combined length of the strips shall be at least 72 inches. The strips, when
applied, shall approximate the outline of the vehicle.
452.3(2) The reflective material may be black, gray,
silver or white in color, but must reflect white when illuminated by other
vehicles’ headlamps.
452.3(3) The reflective material shall be visible from
a distance of not less than 500 feet from the rear of the vehicle when
illuminated by other vehicles’ headlamps.
452.3(4) The reflective material shall be kept free of
dirt and debris.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 321.383(2).
[Filed 3/9/00, effective 5/10/00]
[Published 4/5/00]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/5/00.
Previous Bulletin
Table of Contents
Next Bulletin
© 2000 Cornell College and
League of Women Voters of Iowa
Comments about this site or page?
lsbinfo@legis.state.ia.us.
Please remember that the person listed above does not vote on bills. Direct all comments concerning legislation to State Legislators.
Last update: Wed Apr 5 0:05:01 2000
URL: /Rules/2000/Bulletin/acb000405.html
sam